WO2002010231A2 - Polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides; optical waveguides formed therefrom; and methods for making same - Google Patents

Polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides; optical waveguides formed therefrom; and methods for making same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2002010231A2
WO2002010231A2 PCT/US2001/023732 US0123732W WO0210231A2 WO 2002010231 A2 WO2002010231 A2 WO 2002010231A2 US 0123732 W US0123732 W US 0123732W WO 0210231 A2 WO0210231 A2 WO 0210231A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
polymer composition
group
branched
linear
composition
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2001/023732
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2002010231A3 (en
Inventor
Xiao-Mei Zhao
Robert A.. Shick
Ramakrishna Ravikiran
Phillip S. Neal
Larry F. Rhodes
Andrew Bell
Original Assignee
Goodrich Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Goodrich Corporation filed Critical Goodrich Corporation
Priority to KR1020037001304A priority Critical patent/KR100804249B1/en
Priority to AU2001280856A priority patent/AU2001280856A1/en
Priority to JP2002515959A priority patent/JP5218713B2/en
Priority to EP01959283A priority patent/EP1307493A2/en
Publication of WO2002010231A2 publication Critical patent/WO2002010231A2/en
Publication of WO2002010231A3 publication Critical patent/WO2002010231A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/10Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
    • G02B6/12Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind
    • G02B6/122Basic optical elements, e.g. light-guiding paths
    • G02B6/1221Basic optical elements, e.g. light-guiding paths made from organic materials
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F32/00Homopolymers and copolymers of cyclic compounds having no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain, and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a carbocyclic ring system
    • C08F32/08Homopolymers and copolymers of cyclic compounds having no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain, and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a carbocyclic ring system having two condensed rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F34/00Homopolymers and copolymers of cyclic compounds having no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a heterocyclic ring
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/10Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
    • G02B6/12Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind
    • G02B6/13Integrated optical circuits characterised by the manufacturing method
    • G02B6/132Integrated optical circuits characterised by the manufacturing method by deposition of thin films
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/10Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
    • G02B6/12Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind
    • G02B6/13Integrated optical circuits characterised by the manufacturing method
    • G02B6/138Integrated optical circuits characterised by the manufacturing method by using polymerisation
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F230/00Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing phosphorus, selenium, tellurium or a metal
    • C08F230/04Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing phosphorus, selenium, tellurium or a metal containing a metal
    • C08F230/08Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing phosphorus, selenium, tellurium or a metal containing a metal containing silicon
    • C08F230/085Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and containing phosphorus, selenium, tellurium or a metal containing a metal containing silicon the monomer being a polymerisable silane, e.g. (meth)acryloyloxy trialkoxy silanes or vinyl trialkoxysilanes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F232/00Copolymers of cyclic compounds containing no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain, and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a carbocyclic ring system
    • C08F232/02Copolymers of cyclic compounds containing no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain, and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a carbocyclic ring system having no condensed rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F232/00Copolymers of cyclic compounds containing no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain, and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a carbocyclic ring system
    • C08F232/08Copolymers of cyclic compounds containing no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain, and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a carbocyclic ring system having condensed rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F234/00Copolymers of cyclic compounds having no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a heterocyclic ring
    • C08F234/02Copolymers of cyclic compounds having no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a heterocyclic ring in a ring containing oxygen
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F234/00Copolymers of cyclic compounds having no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a heterocyclic ring
    • C08F234/04Copolymers of cyclic compounds having no unsaturated aliphatic radicals in a side chain and having one or more carbon-to-carbon double bonds in a heterocyclic ring in a ring containing sulfur
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/10Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
    • G02B6/12Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind
    • G02B2006/12035Materials
    • G02B2006/12069Organic material
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/10Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
    • G02B6/12Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind
    • G02B2006/12083Constructional arrangements
    • G02B2006/12097Ridge, rib or the like

Definitions

  • the invention herein described relates generally to polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides and methods for forming such optical waveguides using the same.
  • the present invention relates to polymers made from at least one cyclic olefin monomer which can be used to form optical waveguides using either a clad-first or core first technique.
  • the present invention relates generally to polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides and methods for forming such optical waveguides using the same.
  • the present invention relates to polymers made from at least one cyclic olefin monomer which can be used to form optical waveguides using either a clad-first or core first technique.
  • the present invention relates to polycyclic polymer compositions formed from one or more monomers or oligomers represented by the following structure:
  • each X 1 " independently represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH 2 ) n .- wherein n' is an integer of 1 to 5; "a” represents a single or double bond; R 1 to R 4 independently represent a hydrogen, a hydrocarbyl, or a functional substituent; and m is an integer from 0 to 5, with the proviso that when "a” is a double bond one of R 1 , R 2 and one of R 3 , R 4 are not present.
  • R 1 to R 4 independently comprises a hydrocarbyl, a halogenated hydrocarbyl or a perhalogenated hydrocarbyl group which are selected from: i) linear or branched C r C 10 alkyl groups; ii) linear or branched C 2 -C 10 alkenyl groups; iii) linear or branched C 2 -C 10 alkynyl groups; iv) C 4 -C 12 cycloalkyl groups; v) C 4 -C 12 cycloalkenyl groups; vi) C 6 -C 12 aryl groups; and vii) C 7 -C 24 aralkyl groups, provided that at least one of R 1 to R 4 is a hydrocarbyl group.
  • R 1 to R 4 represent a functional substituent independently selected from -(CH 2 ) n -CH(CF 3 ) 2 -0-Si(Me) 3 , -(CH 2 ) n -CH(CF 3 ) 2 -0-CH 2 -0-CH 3 , -(CH 2 ) n -CH(CF 3 ) 2 -0-C(O)-O-C(CH 3 ) 3 , -(CH 2 ) n -C(CF 3 ) 2 -OH, -(CH 2 ) n C(O)NH 2 , -(CH 2 ) n C(O)CI, -(CH 2 ) n C(O)OR 5 , -(CH 2 ) n -OR 5 , -(CH 2 ) n -OC(O)R s , -(CH 2 ) n -C(O)R 5 , -(CH 2 ) n -
  • R 7 represents a hydrogen or a linear or branched (C, - C 5 ) alkyl group.
  • a polymer composition in accordance with the present invention is formed from one or more monomers or oligomers as described herein in combination with one or more crosslinking agents.
  • the one or more crosslinking agents are latent crosslinking agents.
  • the at least one crosslinking agent can be the compound shown below:
  • the one or more crosslinking agents are represented by one or more of the following structures:
  • the present invention relates to polycyclic polymer compositions formed from one or more monomers or oligomers represented by the following structure:
  • each X 1 " independently represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH 2 ) n - where n' is an integer of 1 to 5; Q represents an oxygen atom or the group N(R 8 ); R 8 is selected from hydrogen, a halogen, a linear or branched 0,-0, 0 alkyl, and C 6 -C 18 aryl; and m is an integer from 0 to 5.
  • a polycyclic polymer composition formed from one or more monomers represented by the following structure:
  • X" 1 represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH 2 ) n .- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5; R D is deuterium, "i” is an integer ranging from 0 to 6, with the proviso that when "i" is 0, at least one of R 1D and R 2 D must be present; R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen, a hydrocarbyl, or a functional substituent; and R 1D and R 2D , which are optional, independently represent a deuterium atom or a deuterium enriched hydrocarbyl group containing at least one deuterium atom.
  • a polymer composition for use in a waveguide is produced from one or more monomers or oligomers described.
  • a polymer composition according to the present invention further includes at least one crosslinking agent.
  • the crosslinking agent is a latent crosslinking agent.
  • the present invention is advantageous in that it provides polymer compositions which permit the formation of optical waveguides having better performance qualities such as, for example, a difference ( ⁇ n) in the refractive index of the core material versus that of the clad material of at least about 0.00075 (i.e., at least about 0.05% where the clad or cladding material has a refractive index of about 1.5) for over a broad wavelength range (e.g., about 400 to about 1600 nm); lower intrinsic optical loss (lower than about 1 dB/cm and in some cases lower than about 0.5 dB/cm); a high glass transition temperature (Tg) (e.g., in one embodiment at least about 150 °C, in another embodiment at least about 250 °C, and in some cases at least about 280 °C).
  • Tg glass transition temperature
  • the present invention is advantageous in that it provides core and/or cladding compositions which can have a low viscosity or viscosities so as to be deliverable by any suitable technique, including ink jet printers, screen printers or stencil printers.
  • the disclosed core-first method for forming optical waveguides is advantageous in that it permits the formation of optical waveguides with a reduction and/or elimination in the occurrence of "swelling" between layers (see Figures 5A and 5B for a photographic depiction of
  • the core-first method permits the formation of improved waveguides.
  • Figure 1 is a step diagram of the steps of a clad-first waveguide formation method
  • Figures 2A to 2C depict waveguide structures formed using the clad-first method of Figure 1 ;
  • Figure 3 is a step diagram of the steps of a core-first waveguide formation method of the present invention.
  • Figures 4A to 4D are another set of waveguides formed using the core- first method of the present invention.
  • Figures 5A and 5B are photographs comparing the clad-first waveguide forming method of Figure 1 to the core-first waveguide forming method of Figure 3;
  • Figure 6 is a step diagram of the steps of a modified core-first waveguide formation method of the present invention.
  • Figures 7A and 7B are optical micrographs depicting a waveguide formed in accordance with the methods of Figures 3 and 6, respectively;
  • Figure 8 is a step diagram of the steps of a method for forming isolate- buried channel waveguides by cutting multi-layer films;
  • FIGS 9A to 9D depict waveguide structure formed using the multilayer method of the present invention.
  • the present invention relates to a variety of methods which can be used to form optical waveguides, and more specifically to form optical waveguides having buried channels. Also, the present invention relates to compositions which can be used to form optical waveguides. It should be noted that in the following text and claims, range and ratio limits and/or range and time limits may be combined. Additionally, as used throughout the specification and claims the terms core composition and cladding (or clad) composition are defined to mean one of the following: (1) a composition which includes at least one monomer;
  • compositions which includes at least one monomer and at least one oligomer, where the total amount of reactive monomer and/or reactive oligomer is at least about 30 weight percent based on the total weight of either the core or cladding composition (2) a composition which includes at least one monomer and at least one oligomer, where the total amount of reactive monomer and/or reactive oligomer is at least about 30 weight percent based on the total weight of either the core or cladding composition; (3) a composition which includes at least one monomer and at least one polymer, where the total amount of reactive monomer is at least about 30 weight percent based on the total weight of either the core or cladding composition; and
  • composition which includes at least one monomer, at least one oligomer and at least one polymer, where the total amount of reactive monomer and/or reactive oligomer is at least about 30 weight percent based on the total weight of either the core or cladding composition.
  • Oligomer as used throughout the specification and claims is defined to mean a composition containing less than about 1000 repeating units of a given monomer.
  • the refractive indices referred to herein were measured using an Abbe refractometer at 589 nm and/or a Metricon Model 2010 prism coupler at 633 nm, 830 nm, and 1550 nm, following the guideline of ASTM Designation #D 542-95.
  • optical waveguides and even buried channel optical waveguides are composed of a core layer having a first index of refraction and a cladding layer having a second index of refraction, wherein the core layer is at least partially encompassed by the cladding layer.
  • the core layer is completely encompassed by the cladding layer (i.e., a buried channel structure or three-layer optical waveguide). It is the core which transmits light and the cladding layer which confines light.
  • the core layer is partially bound by a layer of air.
  • waveguides can be formed via the methods discussed below by using a variety of polymer compounds, such compounds include, but are not limited to, polyacrylates (such as deuterated polyfluoro- methacrylate), polyimides (such as cross-linked polyimides or fluorinated polyimides), benzocyclobutene or fluorinated benzocyclobutene.
  • polyacrylates such as deuterated polyfluoro- methacrylate
  • polyimides such as cross-linked polyimides or fluorinated polyimides
  • benzocyclobutene such as fluorinated benzocyclobutene.
  • the waveguides of the present invention are formed from polymers formed from cyclic olefin monomers.
  • the cyclic olefin monomers used to form the waveguide polymers are norbornene-type monomers.
  • the polymerization of the cycloolefins used in one embodiment of the present invention are, in one embodiment, conducted using a Group 10 metal complex via addition polymerization to yield saturated, high glass transition temperature polymers.
  • the polymerization of the cycloolefins used in one embodiment of the present invention are conducted using a Group 10 metal complex and a weakly coordinating counteranion.
  • the cycloolefins are polymerized by contacting a polymerizable polycycloolefin monomer charge with a high activity catalyst system comprising a Group 10 metal cation complex and a weakly coordinating counteranion complex of the formula:
  • M represents a Group 10 transition metal
  • R 1 represents an anionic hydrocarbyl containing ligand
  • L' represents a Group 15 neutral electron donor ligand
  • L" represents a labile neutral electron donor ligand
  • z is 0 or 1
  • x is 1 or 2
  • y is 0, 1 , 2, or 3, and the sum of x, y, and z equals 4
  • b and d are numbers representing the number of times the cation complex and weakly coordinating counteranion complex (WCA), respectively, are taken to balance the electronic charge on the overall catalyst complex.
  • the monomer charge can be neat or in solution, and is contacted with a preformed catalyst of the foregoing formula.
  • the catalyst can be formed in situ by admixing the catalyst forming components in the monomer charge.
  • the catalyst of the invention comprises a Group 10 metal cation complex and a weakly coordinating counteranion complex represented by Formula I below:
  • M represents a Group 10 transition metal
  • R' represents an anionic hydrocarbyl ligand
  • L' represents a Group 15 neutral electron donor ligand
  • L" represents a labile neutral electron donor ligand
  • x is 1 or 2
  • y is 0, 1 , 2, or 3, wherein the sum of x, y, and z is 4
  • b and d are numbers representing the number of times the cation complex and weakly coordinating counteranion complex (WCA), respectively, are taken to balance the electronic charge of the overall catalyst complex.
  • the weakly coordinating counteranion complex is an anion which is only weakly coordinated to the cation complex. It is sufficiently labile to be displaced by a neutral Lewis base, solvent or monomer.
  • the WCA anion functions as a stabilizing anion to the cation complex and does not transfer to the cation complex to form a neutral product.
  • the WCA anion is relatively inert in that it is non-oxidative, non-reducing, and non-nucleophilic.
  • An anionic hydrocarbyl ligand is any hydrocarbyl ligand which when removed from the metal center M in its closed shell electron configuration, has a negative charge.
  • a neutral electron donor is any ligand which when removed from the metal center M in its closed shell electron configuration, has a neutral charge.
  • a labile neutral electron donor ligand is any ligand which is not as strongly bound to metal center M, is easily displaced therefrom, and when removed from the metal center in its closed shell electron configuration has a neutral charge.
  • M represents a Group 10 metal selected from nickel, palladium. In another embodiment, M represents platinum.
  • anionic hydrocarbyl containing ligands defined under R' include hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C 20 alkyl, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C 2 -C 20 alkenyl, C 6 -C 15 cycloalkenyl, allylic ligands or canonical forms thereof, C 6 -C 30 aryl, C 6 -C 30 heteroatom containing aryl, and C 7 -C 30 aralkyl, each of the foregoing groups can be optionally substituted with hydrocarbyl and/or heteroatom substituents which, in one embodiment, are selected from linear or branched C r C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C.-Cs haloalkyl, linear or branched C 2 -C 5 alkenyl and haloalkenyl, halogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, and phenyl optionally substituted with linear or branched C r C 5 alkyl
  • cycloalkyl, and cycloalkenyl ligands can be monocyclic or multicyclic.
  • the aryl ligands can be a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or a fused ring system (e.g., naphthyl).
  • any of the cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and aryl groups can be taken together to form a fused ring system.
  • Each of the monocyclic, multicyclic and aryl ring systems described above optionally can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted with a substituent independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C C 5 alkoxy, halogen selected from chlorine, fluorine, iodine and bromine, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, C 6 -C 15 cycloalkenyl, and C 6 -C 30 aryl.
  • a multicycloalkyl moiety is a norbomyl ligand.
  • An example of a multicycloalkenyl moiety is a norbornenyl ligand.
  • aryl ligand groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
  • Structure I represents a cationic complex wherein R' is a cycloalkenyl ligand derived from 1 ,5-cyclooctadiene.
  • Structures II and III illustrate cationic complexes wherein R' represents multicycloalkyl and multicycloalkenyl ligands, respectively.
  • the norbornenyl ligand is substituted with an alkenyl group.
  • R' represents a hydrocarbyl ligand containing a terminal group that coordinates to the Group 10 metal.
  • the terminal coordination group containing hydrocarbyl ligand are represented by the formula -C d .H 2d X->, wherein d' represents the number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbyl backbone and is an integer from 3 to 10, and X-* represents an alkenyl or heteroatom containing moiety that coordinates to the Group 10 metal center.
  • the ligand together with the Group 10 metal forms a metallacycle or heteroatom containing metallacycle. Any of the hydrogen atoms on the hydrocarbyl backbone in the formulae above can be independently replaced by a substituent selected from R 1' , R 2' , and R 3' which are defined below.
  • R 4' represents hydrogen, halogen, linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched O,-C 5 haloalkyl, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C 2 -C 5 alkenyl, linear or branched C 2 -C 5 haloalkenyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 - C 18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 7 -C 24 aralkyl.
  • the substituted terminal group containing hydrocarbyl metallacycles can be represented by structure Va, below.
  • n represents an integer from 0 to 8 and R 1' , R 2 , and R 3' independently represent hydrogen, linear or branched C r C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C.,-C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C 2 - C 5 alkenyl, linear or branched C 2 -C 5 haloalkenyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 30 aryl, substituted and unsubstituted C 7 -C 30 aralkyl, and halogen.
  • R 1' , R 2' , and R 3' can be taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached can form a substituted or unsubstituted aliphatic C 5 -C 20 monocyclic or polycyclic ring system, a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 -C 10 aromatic ring system, a substituted and unsubstituted C 10 - C 20 fused aromatic ring system, and combinations thereof.
  • the rings described above can contain monosubstitution or multisubstitution where the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched O,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 alkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, fluorine, iodine and bromine.
  • substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched O,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 alkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, fluorine, iodine and bromine.
  • terminal group containing hydrocarbyl metallacycle cation complexes wherein any of R 1' to R 3' can be taken together to form aromatic ring systems are set forth in Structures Vd to Vg below.
  • n 1 is an integer from 0 to 5; and X, M, L 1 , L", n, x, y, R 1' and R 4' , are as previously defined, and "a" represents a single or double bond, R 5' and R 6' independently represent hydrogen, and linear or branched C r C 10 alkyl, R 5' and R 6' together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached can form a saturated and unsaturated cyclic group containing 5 to 15 carbon atoms.
  • heteroatom containing aryl ligands under R' are pyridinyl and quinolinyl ligands.
  • the allyl ligand in the cationic complex can be represented by the following structure:
  • R 20' , R 21' , and R 22' each independently represent hydrogen, halogen, linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C,-Cg alkenyl, C 6 -C 30 aryl, C 7 -C 30 aralkyl, each optionally substituted with a substituent selected from linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl, halogen, and phenyl which can optionally be substituted with linear or branched Oj-Cg alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl, and halogen.
  • R 20' , R 21' , and R 22' can be linked together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form a cyclic or multicyclic ring, each optionally substituted with linear or branched 0,-Cg alkyl, linear or branched C C 5 haloalkyl, and halogen.
  • allylic ligands suitable in the cationic complexes of the invention include but are not limited to allyl, 2-chloroallyl, crotyl, 1 ,1-dimethyl allyl, 2-methylallyl, 1- phenylallyl, 2-phenylallyl, and ⁇ -pinenyl.
  • Representative neutral electron donor ligands under U include amines, pyridines organophosphorus containing compounds and arsines and stibines, of the formula:
  • E is arsenic or antimony
  • R 7' is independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C r C 10 alkyl, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C,-C 10 alkoxy, allyl, linear or branched C 2 -C 10 alkenyl, C 6 -C 12 aryl, C 6 -C 12 aryloxy, C 6 -C 12 arylsufides (e.g., PhS), C 7 -C 18 aralkyl, cyclic ethers and thioethers, tri(linear or branched C r C 10 alkyl)silyl, tri(C 6 -C 12 aryl)silyl, tri(linear or branched C r C 10 aIkoxy)silyl, triaryloxysilyl, tri(linear or branched C r C 10 alkyl)siloxy, and tri(C 6 -C 12 aryl)sil
  • Representative alkyl groups include but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, and dodecyl.
  • Representative cycloalkyl groups include but are not limited to cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl.
  • Representative alkoxy groups include but are not limited to methoxy, ethoxy, and isopropoxy.
  • Representative cyclic ether and cyclic thioether groups include but are not limited furyl and thienyl, respectively.
  • Representative aryl groups include but are not limited to phenyl, o-tolyl, and naphthyl.
  • Representative aralkyl groups include but are not limited to benzyl, and phenylethyl (i.e., -CH 2 CH 2 PH).
  • Representative silyl groups include but are not limited to triphenylsilyl, trimethylsilyl, and triethylsilyl. As in the general definition above each of the foregoing groups can be optionally substituted with linear or branched C 1 -C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl, and halogen.
  • Representative pyridines include lutidine (including 2,3-; 2,4-; 2,5-; 2,6-; 3,4-; and 3,5-substituted), picoline (including 2-,3-, or 4-substituted), 2,6-di-f- butylpyridine, and 2,4-di-f-butylpyridine.
  • Representative arsines include triphenylarsine, triethylarsine, and triethoxysilylarsine.
  • stibines include triphenylstibine and trithiophenylstibine.
  • Suitable amine ligands can be selected from amines of the formula N(R 8' ) 3 , wherein R 8' independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched O,-C 20 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 3 -C 20 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 7 -C 18 aralkyl.
  • the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C 1 -C 12 alkyl, linear or branched O,-C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched O,-C 5 alkoxy, C 6 -C 12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine.
  • Representative amines include but are not limited to ethylamine, triethylamine, diisopropylamine, tributylamine, N,N-dimethylaniline, N,N-dimethyl-4-f-butyIaniline, N,N-dimethyl-4- f-octylaniline, and N,N-dimethyl-4-hexadecylaniline.
  • the organophosphorus containing ligands include phosphines, phosphites, phosphonites, phosphinites and phosphorus containing compounds of the formula:
  • X' is oxygen, nitrogen, or silicon
  • R 7' is as defined above and each R 7' substituent is independent of the other
  • g is 0, 1 , 2, or 3, and h is 1 , 2, or 3, with the proviso that when X' is a silicon atom, h is 3, when X 1 is an oxygen atom h is 1 , and when X' is a nitrogen atom, h is 2.
  • g is 0 and X' is oxygen
  • any two or 3 of R 7' can be taken together with the oxygen atoms to which they are attached to form a cyclic moiety.
  • any two of R 7' can be taken together with the phosphorus atom to which they are attached to represent a phosphacycle of the formula:
  • organophosphorus compounds can also include bidentate phosphine ligands of the formulae:
  • R 7 is as previously defined and i is 0, 1 , 2, or 3 are also contemplated herein.
  • phosphine ligands include, but are not limited to trimeth lphosphine, triethylphosphine, tri-n-propylphosphine, triisopropylphosphine, tri-n-butylphosphine, tri-sec-butylphosphine, tri-/-butylphosphine, tri-f-butylphosphine, tricyclopentylphosphine, triallylphosphine, tricyclohexylphosphine, triphenylphosphine, trinaphthylphosphine, tri-p-tolylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-m-tolylphosphine, tribenzylphosphine, tri(p-trifluoromethylphenyl)phosphine, tris(trifluoromethyl)phosphine, tri(p-fluorophenyl)phosphine, tri
  • Exemplary bidentate phosphine ligands include but are not limited to(R)- (+)-2,2'-Bis(diphenylphosphino)-1 ,1'-binaphthyl; bis(dicyclohexylphosphino)methane; bis(dicyclohexylphosphino)ethane; bis(diphenylphosphino)methane; bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane.
  • the phosphine ligands can also be selected from phosphine compounds that are water soluble thereby imparting the resulting catalysts with solubility in aqueous media.
  • Selected phosphines of this type include but are not limited to carboxylic substituted phosphines such as 4-(diphenylphosphine)benzoic acid, and 2-(diphenylphosphine)benzoic acid, sodium
  • phosphite ligands include but are not limited to trimethylphosphite, diethylphenylphosphite, triethylphosphite, tris(2,4-di- -butylphenyl)phosphite, tri-n-propylphosphite, triisopropylphosphite, tri- n-butylphosphite, tri-sec-butylphosphite, triisobutylphosphite, tri-f-butylphosphite, dicyclohexylphosphite, tricyclohexylphosphite, triphenylphosphite, tri-p-tolylphosphite, tris(p-trifluoromethylphenyl)phos
  • phosphinite ligands include but are not limited to methyl diphenylphosphinite, ethyl diphenylphosphinite, isopropyl diphenylphosphinite, and phenyl diphenylphosphinite.
  • Examples of phosphonite ligands include but are not limited to diphenyl phenylphosphonite, dimethyl phenylphosphonite, diethyl methylphosphonite, diisopropyl phenylphosphonite, and diethyl phenylphosphonite.
  • Representative labile neutral electron donor ligands are reaction diluent, reaction monomers, DMF, DMSO, dienes including C 4 to C 10 aliphatic and C 4 to C 10 cycloaliphatic dienes representative dienes include butadiene, 1 ,6-hexadiene, and cyclooctadiene (COD), water, chlorinated alkanes, alcohols, ethers, ketones, nitriles, arenes, phosphine oxides, organic carbonates and esters.
  • L labile neutral electron donor ligands
  • chlorinated alkanes include but are not limited to dichloromethane, 1 ,2-dichloroethane, and carbon tetrachloride.
  • Suitable alcohol ligands can be selected from alcohols of the formula
  • R 9' OH, wherein R 9' represents linear or branched C 1 -C 20 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 3 -C 20 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aralkyl.
  • the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C 12 alkyl, linear or branched C C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched 0,-Cg alkoxy, C 6 -C 12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine.
  • Representative alcohols include but are not limited to methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, butanol, hexanol, f-butanol, neopentanol, phenol, 2,6-di-/-propylphenol, 4-f-octylphenol, 5-norbornene-2- methanol, and dodecanol.
  • Suitable ether ligands and thioether ligands can be selected from ethers and thioethers of the formulae (R 10 -O-R 10' ) and (R 10' -S-R 10' ), respectively, wherein R 10' independently represents linear or branched C r C 10 alkyl radicals, linear or branched C r C 20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 3 -C 20 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C 1 -C 20 alkoxy substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aralkyl.
  • the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched 0,-0, 2 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 alkoxy, C 6 -C 12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine, taken together along with the oxygen or sulfur atom to which they are attached to form a cyclic ether or cyclic thioether.
  • ethers include but are not limited to dimethyl ether, dibutyl ether, methyl-f-butyl ether, di-/-propyl ether, diethyl ether, dioctyl ether, 1 ,4-dimethoxyethane, THF, 1 ,4-dioxane and tetrahydrothiophene.
  • Suitable ketone ligands are represented by ketones of the formula R 11' C(O)R 11' wherein R 11' independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched C 1 -C 20 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 2 o haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 3 -C 20 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aralkyl.
  • the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C C 12 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched O,-C 5 alkoxy, C 6 -C 12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine.
  • Representative ketones include but are not limited to acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, and benzophenone.
  • the nitrile ligands can be represented by the formula R 12' CN, wherein R 12' represents hydrogen, linear or branched C r C 20 alkyl, linear or branched C 1 -C 20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 3 -C 20 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aralkyl.
  • the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C r C 12 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 alkoxy, C 6 -C 12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine.
  • Representative nitriles include but are not limited to acetonitrile, propionitrile, benzonitrile, benzyl cyanide, and 5-norbornene-2- carbonitrile.
  • the arene ligands can be selected from substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 12 arenes containing monosubstitution or multisubstitution, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C r C 12 alkyl, linear or branched Ci-Cg haloalkyl, linear or branched O,-Cg alkoxy, C 6 -C 12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine.
  • Representative arenes include but are not limited to toluene, benzene, o-, m-, and p-xylenes, mesitylene, fluorobenzene, o-difluorobenzene, p-difluorobenzene, chlorobenzene, pentafluorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and hexafluorobenzene.
  • Suitable trialkyl and triaryl phosphine oxide ligands can be represented by phosphine oxides of the formula P(O)(R 13' ) 3 , wherein R 13' independently represents linear or branched C,-C 2 o alkyl, linear or branched C 1 -C 20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 3 -C 20 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C r C 20 alkoxy, linear or branched C C 20 haloalkoxy, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 18 aralkyl.
  • R 13' independently represents linear or branched C,-C 2 o alkyl, linear or branched C 1 -C 20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 3 -C 20 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C r C 20 alk
  • the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched 0,-0, 2 alkyl, linear or branched C
  • Representative phosphine oxides include but are not limited to triphenylphosphine oxide, tributylphosphine oxide, trioctylphosphine oxide, tributylphosphate, and tris(2-ethylhexyl)phosphate.
  • Representative carbonates include but are not limited to ethylene carbonate and propylene carbonate.
  • esters include but are not limited to ethyl acetate and /-amyl acetate. WCA Description
  • the weakly coordinating counteranion complex, [WCA], of Formula I can be selected from borates and aluminates, boratobenzene anions, carborane and halocarborane anions.
  • the borate and aluminate weakly coordinating counteranions are represented by Formulae II and III below:
  • M' is boron or aluminum and R 24' , R 25' , R 26' , and R 27' independently represent fluorine, linear or branched C r C 10 alkyl, linear or branched C C 10 alkoxy, linear or branched C 3 -C 5 haloalkenyl, linear or branched C 3 -C 12 trialkylsiloxy, C 18 -C 36 triarylsiloxy, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 30 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 30 aryloxy groups wherein R 24' to R 27' can not all simultaneously represent alkoxy or aryloxy groups.
  • the aryl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from linear or branched C r C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C C 5 alkoxy, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkoxy, linear or branched C r C 12 trialkylsilyl, C 6 -C 18 triarylsilyl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. In another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine.
  • borate anions under Formula II include but are not limited to tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(4-fluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3,5-difluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3,4,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)borate, methyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, ethyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, phenyltris(perfluoropheny
  • Representative aluminate anions under Formula II include but are not limited to tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, tris(perfIuorobiphenyl)fIuoroaluminate, (octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)aluminate, and methyltris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate.
  • R 28' , R 29' , R 30' , and R 31' independently represent linear or branched C r C 10 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 10 haloalkyl, C 2 -C 10 haloalkenyl, substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 30 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C 7 -C 30 aralkyl groups, subject to the proviso that at least three of R 28' to R 31' must contain a halogen containing substituent.
  • the aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from linear or branched C r C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C C 5 alkoxy, linear or branched C r C 10 haloalkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. In another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine.
  • the groups OR 28' and OR 29' can be taken together to form a chelating substituent represented by -0-R 32' -O-, wherein the oxygen atoms are bonded to M' and R 32' is a divalent radical selected from substituted and unsubstituted C 6 -C 30 aryl and substituted and unsubstituted C 7 - C 30 aralkyl.
  • the oxygen atoms are bonded, either directly or through an alkyl group, to the aromatic ring in the ortho or meta position.
  • the aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from linear or branched C r C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C C 5 alkoxy, linear or branched C,-C 10 haloalkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. In another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine.
  • divalent R 32' radicals are illustrated below:
  • R 33' independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C C 5 haloalkyl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine (in another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine);
  • R 34' can be a monosubstituent or taken up to four times about each aromatic ring depending on the available valence on each ring carbon atom and independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C 1 -C 5 alkoxy, linear or branched C r C 10 haloalkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine (in one embodiment, the halogen is fluorine); and n" independently represents an integer from 0 to 6.
  • Representative chelating groups of the formula -O-R 32' -O- include but are not limited to are 2,3,4,5-tetrafluorobenzenediolate (-OC 6 F 4 O-), 2,3,4,5- tetrachlorobenzenediolate (-OC 6 CI 4 O-), and 2,3,4,5-tetrabromobenzenediolate (-OC 6 Br 4 O-), and bis(1 ,r-bitetrafluorophenyl-2,2'-diolate).
  • Representative borate and aluminate anions under Formula III include but are not limited to [B(OC(CF 3 ) 3 ) 4 ]-, [B(OC(CF 3 ) 2 (CH 3 )) 4 ]-, [B(OC(CF 3 ) 2 H) 4 ]-, [B(OC(CF 3 )(CH 3 )H) 4 ]-, [Al(OC(CF 3 ) 2 Ph) 4 ]-, [B(OCH 2 (CF 3 ) 2 ) 4 ]-, [AI(OC(CF 3 ) 2 C 6 H 4 CH 3 ) 4 ]-, [AI(OC(CF 3 ) 3 ) 4 r, [Al(OC(CF 3 )(CH 3 )H) 4 ]-, [AI(OC(CF 3 ) 2 H) 4 ]-, [AI(OC(CF 3 ) 2 C 6 H 4 -4-/-Pr) 4 ]-, [AI(OC(CF 3 ) 2 C 6 H 4 -4
  • boratobenzene anions useful as the weakly coordinating counteranion can be represented by Formula IV below:
  • R 34' is selected from fluorine, fluorinated hydrocarbyl, perfluorocarbyl, and fluorinated and perfluorinated ethers.
  • halohydrocarbyl means that at least one hydrogen atom on the hydrocarbyl radical, e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, and aralkyl groups, is replaced with a halogen atom selected from chlorine, bromine, iodine, and fluorine (e.g., haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, halocycloalkyl, haloaryl, and haloaralkyl).
  • fluorohydrocarbyl means that at least one hydrogen atom on the hydrocarbyl radical is replaced by fluorine.
  • the degree of halogenation can range from at least one hydrogen atom being replaced by a halogen atom (e.g., a monofluoromethyl group) to full halogenation (perhalogenation) wherein all hydrogen atoms on the hydrocarbyl group have been replaced by a halogen atom (e.g., perhalocarbyl such as trifluoromethyl (perfluoromethyl)).
  • the fluorinated hydrocarbyl and perfluorocarbyl radicals contain, in one embodiment, 1 to 24 carbon atoms.
  • fluorinated hydrocarbyl and perfluorocarbyl radicals contain 1 to 12 carbon atoms. In yet another embodiment, fluorinated hydrocarbyl and perfluorocarbyl radicals contain 6 carbon atoms and can be linear or branched, cyclic, or aromatic.
  • the fluorinated hydrocarbyl and perfluorocarbyl radicals include but are not limited to fluorinated and perfluorinated linear or branched C r C 24 alkyl, fluorinated and perfluorinated C 3 -C 24 cycloalkyl, fluorinated and perfluorinated C 2 -C 24 alkenyl, fluorinated and perfluorinated C 3 -C 24 cycloalkenyl, fluorinated and perfluorinated C 6 -C 24 aryl, and fluorinated and perfluorinated C 7 -C 24 aralkyl.
  • the fluorinated and perfluorocarbyl ether substituents are represented by the formulae -(CH 2 ) m OR 36' , or -(CF 2 ) m OR 36' respectively, wherein R 36' is a fluorinated or perfluorocarbyl group as defined above, m is and integer of 0 to 5. It is to be noted that when m is 0 the oxygen atom in the ether moiety is directly bonded attached to the boron atom in the boratobenzene ring.
  • R 34' radicals include those that are electron withdrawing in nature such as, for example, fluorinated and perfluorinated hydrocarbyl radicals selected from trifluoromethyl, perfluoroethyl, perfluoropropyl, perfluoroisopropyl, pentafluorophenyl and bis(3,5-trifluoromethyl)phenyl.
  • R 35' independently represents hydrogen, halogen, perfluorocarbyl, and silylperfluorocarbyl radicals, wherein the perfluorocarbyl and silylperfluorocarbyl are as defined previously.
  • the halogen groups are selected from chlorine, fluorine.
  • the halogen is fluorine.
  • the radical(s) are, in one embodiment, ortho or para to the boron atom in the boratobenzene ring.
  • R 35' is halogen, perfluorocarbyl, and/or silylperfluorocarbyl
  • the radical(s) are para to the boron atom in the boratobenzene ring.
  • Representative boratobenzene anions include but are not limited to [1 ,4-dihydro-4-methyl-1-(pentafluorophenyl)]-2-borate, 4-(1 ,1-dimethyl)-1 ,2- dihydro-1 -(pentafluorophenyI)-2-borate, 1 -fluoro-1 ,2-dihydro-4- (pentafluorophenyl)-2-borate, and 1-[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1 ,2-dihydro- 4-(pentafluorophenyl)-2-borate.
  • the carborane and halocarborane anions useful as the weakly coordinating counteranion include but are not limited to CB 11 (CH 3 ) 12 " , CB ⁇ H ⁇ “ , 1-C 2 H 5 CB ⁇ .,rl .,., “ , 1-Ph 3 SiCB 11 H 11 " , 1-CF 3 CB 1 H 1 , 12-BrCB ⁇ H ⁇ “ , 12-BrCB ⁇ H ⁇ “ , 7,12-Br 2 CB 11 H 10 " , 12-CICB ⁇ H ⁇ " , 7,12-C ⁇ CB ⁇ H ⁇ , 1-H-CB ⁇ F ⁇ " , 1-CH 3 -CB.,.,F.
  • 6-CB 9 H 9 P 6,8-CB 9 H 8 F 2 -, 6,7,8-CB g H 7 F 3 -, 6,7,8,9-CB 9 H 6 F 4 -, 2,6,7,8,9-CB 9 H 5 F 5 -, CBgHgBrg " , 6,7,9,10,11 Co(Br 3 C 2 B 9 H 8 ) 2 - and dodecahydro-1- carbadodecaborate.
  • the catalysts of Formula I can be prepared as a preformed single component catalyst in solvent or can be prepared in situ by admixing the catalyst precursor components in the desired monomer to be polymerized.
  • the single component catalyst of Formula I can be prepared by admixing the catalyst precursors in an appropriate solvent, allowing the reaction to proceed under appropriate temperature conditions, and isolating the catalyst product.
  • a Group 10 metal pro-catalyst is admixed with a Group 15 electron donor compound and/or a labile neutral electron donor compound, and a salt of a weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to yield the preformed catalyst complex set forth under Formula I above.
  • a Group 10 metal pro-catalyst containing a Group 15 electron donor ligand is admixed with a salt of a weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to yield the preformed catalyst complex.
  • the catalyst preparation reactions are carried out in solvents that are inert under the reaction conditions.
  • solvents suitable for the catalyst preparation reaction include but are not limited to alkane and cycloalkane solvents such as pentane, hexane, heptane, and cyclohexane; halogenated alkane solvents such as dichloromethane, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, ethylchloride, 1 ,1-dichloroethane, 1 ,2-dichloroethane, 1-chloropropane, 2- chloropropane, 1-chlorobutane, 2-chlorobutane, 1-chloro-2-methylpropane, and 1-chloropentane; ethers such as THF and diethylether; aromatic solvents such as benzene, xylene, toluene, mesitylene, chlorobenzene, and o-dichlorobenzene; and halocarbon
  • solvents include, for example, benzene, fluorobenzene, o-difluorobenzene, p-difluorobenzene, pentafluorobenzene, hexafluorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, chlorobenzene, toluene, o-, m-, and p-xylenes, mesitylene, cyclohexane, THF, and dichloromethane.
  • a suitable temperature range for carrying out the reaction is from about
  • the temperature range for carrying out the reaction is from about -30°C to about 100°C. In yet another embodiment, the temperature range for carrying out the reaction is from about 0°C to about 65°C. In still yet another embodiment, the temperature range for carrying out the reaction is from about 10°C to about 40°C. Pressure is not critical but may depend on the boiling point of the solvent employed, i.e. sufficient pressure to maintain the solvent in the liquid phase. Reaction times are not critical, and can range from several minutes to 48 hours. In one embodiment, the reactions are carried out under inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon.
  • the reaction is carried out by dissolving the pro-catalyst in a suitable solvent and admixing the appropriate ligand(s) and the salt of the desired weakly coordinating anion with the dissolved pro-catalyst, and optionally heating the solution until the reaction is complete.
  • the preformed single component catalyst can be isolated or can be used directly by adding aliquots of the preformed catalyst in solution to the polymerization medium. Isolation of the product can be accomplished by standard procedures, such as evaporating the solvent, washing the solid with an appropriate solvent, and then recrystallizing the desired product.
  • the molar ratios of catalyst components employed in the preparation the preformed single component catalyst of the invention is based on the metal contained in the pro-catalyst component.
  • the molar ratio of pro-catalyst/Group 15 electron donor component/WCA salt is 1 :1-10:1-100, In another embodiment, the molar ratio of pro-catalyst/Group 15 electron donor component/WCA salt is 1 :1-5:1-20. In yet another embodiment, the molar ratio of pro-catalyst/Group 15 electron donor component/WCA salt is 1 : 1 -2: 1 -5. In embodiments of the invention where the pro-catalyst is ligated with a Group 15 electron donor ligand and/or a labile neutral electron donor ligand the molar ratio of pro-catalyst (based on the metal content) to WCA salt is 1 :1-100.
  • this ratio is 1 :1-20. In yet another embodiment, this ratio is 1 :1-5.
  • a Group 10 metal pro-catalyst dimer of the formula [R'MA'] 2 is admixed with a Group 15 electron donor compound, (L 1 ), and a salt of a suitable weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to produce the single component catalyst product as shown in equation (1) below.
  • Suitable pro-catalyst dimers of the formula [R'MA'] 2 include but are not limited to the following compositions (allyl)palladiumtrifluoroacetate dimer, (allyl)palladiumchloride dimer, (crotyl)palladiumchloride dimer, (allyl)palladiumiodide dimer, ( ⁇ -pinenyl)palladiumchloride dimer, methallylpalladium chloride dimer, 1,1-dimethylallylpalladium chloride dimer, and
  • a ligated Group 10 metal pro-catalyst of the formula [R'M(L") y A'] is admixed with a Group 15 electron donor compound, (L'), and a salt of a suitable weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to produce the single component catalyst product as shown in equation (2) below.
  • a representative pro-catalyst of the formula [R'M(L") y A'] includes but is not limited to (COD)palladium (methyl)chloride.
  • a Group 10 metal ligated pro-catalyst of the formula [R'M(L') x A'] containing the Group 15 electron donor ligand (L') is admixed with a salt of a suitable weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to produce the single component catalyst product as shown in equation (3) below.
  • Suitable pro-catalysts of the formula [R'M(L') X A'] include but are not limited to the ollowing compositions: ally pal adium(tricyclohexylphosphine)chloride, ally!
  • pal adium(tricyclohexylphosphine)triflate ally] pal adium(triisopropylphosphine)triflate, ally pal adium(tricyclopentylphosphine)triflate, ally pal adium(tricycIohexylphosphine)trifluoroacetate (also referred to herein as Allyl Pd-PCy 3 TFA), ally pal adiumrtr o-tolylphosphine)chloride, ally pal adium(tri o-tolylphosphine)triflate, ally pal adiumrtri -o-tolylphosphine)nitrate, ally pal adium(tri -o-tolylphosphine)acetate, allyl pal adiumrtri isopropylphosphine)triflimide, ally pal adiumrtri cyclohexylphosphine)triflimide
  • pro-catalyst components suitable for use in the foregoing process include (Me 2 NCH 2 C 6 H 4 )Pd(0 3 SCF 3 )P(cyclohexyl) 3 (i.e., ortho-metallatedphenylmethlyenedimethylamino palladium tricyclohexylphosphine), (allyl)Pd(P-/-Pr 3 )C 6 F 5 , (allyl)Pd(PCy 3 )C 6 F 5 , (CH 3 )Pd(PMe 3 ) 2 CI, (C 2 H 5 )Pd(PMe 3 ) 2 CI (Ph)Pd(PMe 3 ) 2 CI, (CH 3 )Pd(PMe 3 ) 2 Br, (CH 3 )Pd(PMe 2 Ph) 2 CI, (C 2 H 5 )Pd(PMe 3 ) 2 Br, (C 2 H 5 )Pd(PMe 3 ) 2 Br, (C 2 H 5
  • the catalyst can be formed by protonating a pro- catalyst of the formula:
  • R' is a divalent hydrocarbyl ligand of the formula -(C d H 2d )- that is taken together with the Group 10 metal center M to form a metallacycle where d' represents the number of carbon atoms in the divalent hydrocarbyl backbone and is an integer from 3 to 10.
  • Any of the hydrogen atoms on the divalent hydrocarbyl backbone can be replaced by linear or branched C,- C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, and C 6 -C 10 aryl.
  • the cycloalkyl and aryl moieties can optionally be substituted with a halogen substituent selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, and iodine.
  • the halogen is fluorine.
  • any two or three of the alkyl substituents taken together with the hydrocarbyl backbone carbon atoms to which they are attached can form an aliphatic or aromatic ring system.
  • the rings can be monocyclic, polycyclic, or fused. Protonation occurs at one of the hydrocarbyl/metal center bond interfaces to yield a cation complex with a monovalent hydrocarbyl ligand coordinated to the metal center M.
  • a Group 10 metal ligated pro-catalyst of the formula [R , M(L') x (L") y A'] containing a Group 15 electron donor ligand ( ) and a labile neutral electron donor ligand (L”) is admixed with a salt of a suitable weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to produce the single component catalyst product as shown in equation (5) below.
  • Suitable pro-catalysts of the formula [R , M(L') x (L") y A'] include but are not limited to the following compositions:
  • the catalyst of Formula I is generated by reacting a pro-catalyst of the formula [M(L') x (L") y (A') 2 ] with an organometallic compound of aluminum, lithium or magnesium, and a source of a weakly coordinating anion (WCA) or a strong Lewis Acid.
  • WCA weakly coordinating anion
  • the anionic hydrocarbyl ligand (R') on the group 10 metal center (M) is supplied via reaction with the organometallic compound to yield the active catalyst as shown below.
  • pro-catalysts suitable for use in this embodiment include : nickel acetylacetonate, nickel carboxylates, nickel(ll) chloride, nickel(ll) bromide, nickel ethylhexanoate, nickel(ll) trifluoroacetate, nickel(ll) hexafluoroacetylacetonate,
  • PdCI 2 P(cyclohexyl) 3 ) 2 , palladium(ll) bromide, palladium(ll) chloride, palladium(ll) iodide, palladium(ll) ethylhexanoate, dichloro bis(acetonitrile)palladium(ll), dibromo bis(benzonitrile)palladium(ll), platinum(ll) chloride, platinum(ll) bromide, and platinum bis(triphenylphosphine)dichloride.
  • the Group 10 metal pro-catalyst is a nickel(ll), platinum(ll) or palladium(ll) compound containing two anionic leaving groups (A'), which can be readily displaced by the weakly coordinating anion that is provided by the WCA salt or strong Lewis acid described below and can be replaced by hydrocarbyl groups originating from the organometallic compound.
  • the leaving groups can be the same or different.
  • the Group 10 metal pro-catalyst may or may not be ligated.
  • the Group 15 electron donor ligand can be added to the reaction medium as shown in the following reaction scheme.
  • the strong Lewis acids suitable for use in this embodiment are selected from compounds of the formula: M'(R 41' ) 3
  • M' represents aluminum or boron and R 41' represents monosubstituted and multisubstituted C 6 -C 30 aryl, wherein the substituents on the aryl group are independently selected from halogen (in one embodiment, the halogen is fluorine), linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl (in one embodiment, trifluoromethyl), and halogenated and perhalogenated phenyl (in one embodiment, pentafluorophenyl).
  • halogen in one embodiment, the halogen is fluorine
  • linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl in one embodiment, trifluoromethyl
  • halogenated and perhalogenated phenyl in one embodiment, pentafluorophenyl
  • Examples of such strong Lewis acids include: tris(pentafluorophenyl)boron, tris(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)boron, tris(2,2',2"- nonafluorobiphenyl)borane, and tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminum.
  • the organometallic compound is a hydrocarbyl derivative of silicon, germanium, tin, lithium, magnesium or aluminum. In one embodiment, aluminum derivatives are utilized.
  • the organoaluminum component of the catalyst system is represented by the formula:
  • R' independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched C,.C 20 alkyl, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C 2 -C 20 alkenyl, C 6 -C 15 cycloalkenyl, allylic ligands or canonical forms thereof, C 6 -C 20 aryl, and C 7 -C 30 aralkyl
  • Q is a halide or pseudohalide selected from chlorine, fluorine, bromine, iodine, linear and unbranched C,-C 20 alkoxy, C 6 -C 24 aryloxy;
  • x" is 0 to 2.5. In another embodiment, x" is 0 to 2. In yet another embodiment, x" is 0 to 1.
  • trialkylaluminum compounds are used.
  • suitable organometallic compounds include: methyllithium, sec-butyllithium, n-butyllithium, phenyllithium, butylethylmagnesium, di- ⁇ -butylmagnesium, butyloctylmagnesium, trimethylaluminum, triethylaluminum, tri- ⁇ -propylaluminum, tri-/-propylaluminum, tri-/-butylaluminum, tri-2-methylbutylaluminum, tri-octylaluminum, diethylaluminum chloride, ethylaluminum dichloride, di-/-butylaluminum chloride, diethylaluminum bromide, ethylaluminum sesquichloride, diethylaluminum ethoxide, diethylaluminum(/-butylphenoxide), and diethylaluminum(2,
  • Embodiments of the catalyst devoid of a hydrocarbyl containing ligand can be synthesized by reacting a pro-catalyst of the formula [M(A') 2 ] with the desired ligands and WCA salt in accordance with the following reaction scheme:
  • pro-catalyst compounds examples include palladium(ll) bis(acetylacetonate, palladium (acetate) 2 , Pd(NO 3 ) 2 , PdCI 2 , PdBr 2 , and Pdl 2 .
  • the foregoing schematic equations (1 to 8) have been presented for illustrative purposes only. While they have been written in balanced form, it should be recognized that an excess of reaction components can be employed without deviating from the spirit of invention. For example, an excess of L', L", A', or WCA salt containing components can be employed in the process of the invention so long as the process is not deleteriously affected.
  • the molar ratio of the Group 10 metal/Group 15 electron donor compound/source of a weakly coordinating anion/organometallic compound is 1 :1-10:1-100:2-200. In another embodiment, the molar ratio of the
  • Group 10 metal/Group 15 electron donor compound/source of a weakly coordinating anion/organometallic compound is 1 :1-5:1-40:4-100.
  • the molar ratio of the Group 10 metal/Group 15 electron donor compound/source of a weakly coordinating anion/organometallic compound is 1 :1-2:2-20:5-50.
  • the Group 10 metal ion source is an adduct containing a Group 15 electron donor compound, no additional Group 15 electron donor compound need be employed.
  • the molar ratio of the Group 10 metal/Group 15 electron donor compound/source of a weakly coordinating anion/organometallic compound is 1 :0:2-20:5-50.
  • the catalysts of Formula I can be prepared as a preformed single component catalyst in solvent or they can be prepared in situ by admixing the precursor components (ligated or non-ligated Group 10 metal component with leaving group(s), ligand component(s), and WCA source or strong Lewis acid source) in the desired monomer, monomer mixtures, or solutions thereof. It is also possible to admix two or even three of the catalyst precursor components and then add the mixture to the monomer or monomer solution containing the remaining catalyst precursor component(s).
  • R', M, L', L", [WCA], b, d, x, and y are as defined above unless otherwise defined,
  • A' is an anionic leaving group which is defined below
  • [WCA] salt is a metal salt of the weakly coordinating anion [WCA]
  • Me, Et, Pr, Bu, Cy, and Ph as used here and throughout the specification refer to methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, cyclohexyl, and phenyl, respectively.
  • Group 10 metal pro-catalyst components are commercially available or can be synthesized by techniques well known in the art.
  • catalyst complex of Formula I can be formed in situ by combining any of the Group 10 metal pro-catalysts with the desired catalyst system components in monomer.
  • the pro-catalyst is mixed in monomer along with the WCA salt or the alternative activators such as strong Lewis acids or Br ⁇ nsted acids.
  • the WCA salt, strong Lewis acid or Br ⁇ nsted acid serves as the an activator for the pro-catalyst in the presence of monomer.
  • A' represents an anionic leaving group that can be readily displaced by the weakly coordinating anion that is provided by the WCA salt.
  • the leaving group forms a salt with the cation on the WCA salt.
  • Leaving group A' is selected from halogen (i.e., Br, CI, I, and F), nitrate, triflate (trifluoromethanesulfonate), triflimide
  • the leaving group can be a hydrocarbyl group or halogenated hydrocarbyl group when a Br ⁇ nsted acid based WCA salt is utilized as the activator.
  • the activator protonates the hydrocarbyl or halogenated hydrocarbyl forming a neutral moiety.
  • the leaving group moiety is, in one embodiment, selected from the hydride, linear or branched C,-Cg alkyl, linear or branched C r C 5 haloalkyl, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, and C 6 -C 10 aryl.
  • the cycloalkyl and aryl moieties can optionally be substituted with a halogen substituent selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, and iodine.
  • the halogen is fluorine.
  • A' is protonated to yield the neutral moiety A'H.
  • Methyl and pentafluorophenyl groups are representative examples of leaving groups under this embodiment. Halogen leaving groups include chlorine, iodine, bromine and fluorine.
  • the acetates include groups of the formula R 38' C(O)O "
  • the carbonates include groups of the formula R 38' OC(O)O "
  • R 38' represents linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl (in one embodiment, the haloalkyl contains only fluorine), linear or branched 0,-Cg alkenyl, C 6 -C 12 aryl, optionally monosubstituted or independently multisubstituted with linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl, and halogen (in one embodiment, fluorine).
  • G is a sulfur or oxygen atom
  • Ph represents phenyl and substituted phenyl as defined below
  • R 39' independently represents linear or branched C.,-C., 0 alkyl, linear or branched C r C 10 chloro- or bromoalkyl, C 5 -C 10 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted aryl (in one embodiment, phenyl and substituted phenyl), substituted and unsubstituted C 7 -C 20 aralkyl (in one embodiment, phenylalkyl and substituted phenylalkyl).
  • aryl or phenyl groups can contain one or more of linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C 5 haloalkyl, chlorine, and bromine substituents, and combinations thereof.
  • aluminate groups include but are not limited to tetraphenoxyaluminate, tetrakis(cycIohexanolato)aluminate, tetraethoxyaluminate, tetramethoxyaluminate, tetrakis(isopropoxy)aluminate, tetrakis(2-butanolato)aluminate, tetrapentyloxyaluminate, tetrakis(2-methyl-2- propanolato)aluminate, tetrakis(nonyloxy)aluminate, and bis(2-methoxyethanolate-O,O')bis(2-methoxyethanolate-O')aluminate, tetrakis(phenyl)aluminate, tetrakis(p-tolyl)aluminate, tetrakis(m-tolyl)aluminate, tetrakis(2,4-
  • borate groups include tetraphenylborate, tetrakis(4-methylphenyl)borate, tetrakis(4-chlorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(4-bromophenyl)borate, tetrakis(2-bromo-4-chlorophenyl)borate, butyltriphenylborate, tetrakis(4-methoxyphenyl)borate, tetrakis(phenylethynyl)borate, bis(1 ,2-benzenediolato)borate, triphenyl(phenylethynyl)borate, bis(tetrafluorobenzenediolate)borate, bis(tetrachlorobenzenediolate)borate, bis(tetrabromobenzenedio!ate)borate, bis(1 ,1'-biphenyl-2,2'-diolato)borate, tetrakis
  • A' can also be selected from highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkylsulfonyl and arylsulfonyl containing anions of the formulae (R 40' SO 2 ) 2 CH-, (R 40' SO 2 ) 3 C " , and (R 40' SO 2 ) 2 N-, wherein R 40' independently represents linear or branched C,-C 20 highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkyl, C 5 -C 15 highly fluorinated and perfluorinated cycloalkyl, and highly fluorinated and perfluorinated C 6 -C 22 aryl.
  • the alkyl and cycloalkyl groups can contain a heteroatom in the chain of cyclic structure, respectively.
  • the heteroatoms include divalent (non-peroxidic) oxygen (i.e., -O-), trivalent nitrogen, and hexavalent sulfur. Any two of R 40' can be taken together to form a ring.
  • R 40' is a cycloalkyl substituent, a heterocycloalkyl substituent, or is taken with another R 40' group to form a ring
  • the ring structures in one embodiment, contain 5 or 6 atoms, 1 or 2 of which can be heteroatoms.
  • the term highly fluorinated means that at least 50 percent of the hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atoms in the alkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl moieties are replaced by fluorine atoms.
  • at least 2 out of every 3 hydrogen atoms on the alkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl moieties under R 40' are replaced by fluorine.
  • at least 3 out of every 4 hydrogen atoms are replaced by fluorine.
  • all of the hydrogen atoms on the R 40' substituent are replaced by fluorine to give the perfluorinated moiety.
  • the aryl groups can contain linear or branched C,-
  • C 10 highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkyl groups such as, for example, trifluoromethyl.
  • hydrogen atoms remain on the alkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl moieties, a portion or all of the remaining hydrogen atoms can be replaced with bromine and/or chlorine atoms.
  • Representative highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkylsulfonyl and arylsulfonyl containing anions of the foregoing formulae include but are not limited to (C 2 F 5 SO 2 ) 2 N-, (C 4 F 9 SO 2 ) 2 N " , (CF 3 S0 2 ) 2 N-, (CF 3 SO 2 )(C 4 F 9 SO 2 )N-, ((CF 3 ) 2 NC 2 F 4 SO 2 ) 2 N-, (C 6 F 5 SO 2 )(CF 3 SO 2 )N-, (CF 3 SO 2 )(CHF 2 SO 2 )N-, (C 2 F 5 SO 2 )(CF 3 SO 2 )N-, (C 3 F 7 SO 2 ) 2 N " , ((CF 3 ) 2 (F)CSO 2 ) 2 N " , (C 4 F 8 (CF 3 ) 2 NS0 2 ) 2 N " ' (C 8 F 17 SO 2 ) 3 C-, (CF 3 SO
  • the salt of the weakly coordinating anion employed in the process of the present invention can be represented by the formula [C(L") z ] b [WCA] d , wherein C represents a proton (H + ), an alkaline earth metal cation, a transition metal cation or an organic group containing cation, L" and WCA, are as defined above, z is an integer from 0 to 8, and b and d represent the number of times the cation complex and weakly coordinating counteranion complex (WCA), respectively, are taken to balance the electronic charge on the overall salt complex.
  • the alkali metal cations include Group 1 metals selected from lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, and cesium. In one embodiment, the Group 1 metal cations are lithium, sodium and potassium.
  • the alkali earth metal cations include Group 2 metals selected from beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, and barium. In one embodiment, the
  • Group 2 metal cations are magnesium, calcium, strontium, and barium.
  • the transition metal cation is selected from zinc, silver, and thallium.
  • the organic group cation is selected from ammonium, phosphonium, carbonium and silylium cations, i.e., [NHR 41' 3 ] + , [NR 41' 4 ] + , [PHR 41 3 ], [PR 41' 4 ], [R 41' 3 C] + , and [R 41' 3 Si] + , where R 41' independently represents a hydrocarbyl, silylhydrocarbyl, or perfluorocarbyl group, each containing 1 to 24 carbon atoms, (or in another embodiment, from 1 to 12 carbons) arranged in a linear, branched, or ring structure.
  • perfluorocarbyl is meant that all carbon bonded hydrogen atoms are replaced by a fluorine atom.
  • Representative hydrocarbyl groups include but are not limited to linear or branched C,-C 20 alkyl, C 3 -C 20 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C 2 to C 20 alkenyl, C 3 -C 20 cycloalkenyl, C 6 -C 24 aryl, and C 7 -C 24 aralkyl, and organometallic cations.
  • the organic cations are selected from trityl, trimethylsilylium, triethylsilylium, tris(trimethylsilyl)silylium, tribenzylsilylium, triphenylsilylium, tricyclohexylsilylium, dimethyloctadecylsilylium, and triphenylcarbenium (i.e., trityl).
  • ferrocenium cations such as [(C 5 H 5 ) 2 Fe] + and [(C 5 (CH 3 )) 2 Fe] + are also useful as the cation in the WCA salts of the invention.
  • WCA salts having a weakly coordinating anion described under Formula II include but are not limited to lithium tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, silver tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, silver tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, ferrocenium tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, ferrocenium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(4-fluorophenyl)borate
  • Formula III include but are not limited to LiB(OC(CF 3 ) 3 ) 4 , LiB(OC(CF 3 ) 2 (CH 3 )) 4 ,
  • LiB(OC(CF 3 ) 2 H) 4 LiB(OC(CF 3 )(CH 3 )H) 4 , TIB(OC(CF 3 ) 3 ) 4 , TIB(OC(CF 3 ) 2 H) 4 ,
  • boratobenzene salts include but are not limited to [1 ,4-dihydro-4- methyl-1-(pentafluorophenyl)]-2-borinyl lithium, [1 ,4-dihydro-4-methyl-1-
  • WCA carborane and halocarborane salts include but are not limited to silver dodecahydro-1-carbadodecaborate, LiCB 11 (CH 3 ) 12 , LiCB ⁇ H ⁇ ,
  • the catalysts of the present invention are suitable for the preparation of a wide range of polymers comprising cyclic repeating units.
  • the cyclic polymers are prepared by the addition polymerization of a polycycloolefin monomer(s) in the presence of a catalytic amount of a catalyst of Formula I or the pro-catalyst components described above.
  • the monomer(s) can be polymerized via solution or mass polymerization techniques.
  • polycycloolefin polycycloolefin
  • polycyclic and “norbornene-type” monomer are used interchangeably and mean that the monomer contains at least one norbornene moiety as shown below:
  • X"' represents oxygen, nitrogen with hydrogen or a C, to C 10 alkyl linear or branched being bonded thereto, sulfur or a methylene group of the formula -(CH 2 ) n .- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5.
  • the simplest polycyclic monomer of the invention is the bicyclic monomer, bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, commonly referred to as norbornene.
  • norbornene-type monomer is meant to include norbornene, substituted norbomene(s), and any substituted and unsubstituted higher cyclic derivatives thereof so long as the monomer contains at least one norbornene-type or substituted norbornene-type moiety.
  • the substituted norbornene-type monomers and higher cyclic derivatives thereof contain a pendant hydrocarbyl substituent(s) or a pendant functional substituent(s) containing an oxygen atom.
  • the norbornene-type or polycycloolefin monomers are represented by the structure below:
  • each X'" is independently defined as above, "a” represents a single or double bond, R 1 to R 4 independently represent a hydrogen, hydrocarbyl or functional substituent, m is an integer from 0 to 5, and when "a" is a double bond one of R ⁇ R 2 and one of R 3 , R 4 are not present.
  • R 1 to R 4 can be a halohydrocarbyl, or perhalohydrocarbyl group, or even a perhalocarbyl group (e.g., a trifluormethyl group).
  • R 1 to R 4 independently represent hydrocarbyl, halogenated hydrocarbyl and perhalogenated hydrocarbyl groups selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C 10 alkyl, linear or branched, C 2 -C 10 alkenyl, linear or branched C 2 -C 10 alkynyl, C 4 -C 12 cycloalkyl, C 4 -C 12 cycloalkenyl, C 6 - C 12 aryl, and C 7 -C 24 aralkyl, R 1 and R 2 or R 3 and R 4 can be taken together to represent a C,-C., 0 alkylidenyl group.
  • Representative alkyl groups include but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, and decyl.
  • Representative alkenyl groups include but are not limited to vinyl, allyl, butenyl, and cyclohexenyl.
  • Representative alkynyl groups include but are not limited to ethynyl, 1 -propynyl, 2- propynyl, 1-butynyl, and 2-butynyl.
  • Representative cycloalkyl groups include but are not limited to cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl substituents.
  • Representative aryl groups include but are not limited to phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl.
  • Representative aralkyl groups include but are not limited to benzyl, and phenethyl.
  • Representative alkylidenyl groups include methylidenyl, and ethylidenyl, groups.
  • the perhalohydrocarbyl groups include perhalogenated phenyl and alkyl groups.
  • halogenated alkyl groups useful in the invention are partially or fully halogenated and are linear or branched, and have the formula C z X" 2z+1 wherein X" is independently a halogen as set forth above or a hydrogen and z is selected from an integer of 1 to 20.
  • each X" is independently selected from hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine and/or bromine.
  • each X" is independently either a hydrogen or a fluorine.
  • the perfluorinated substituents include perfluorophenyl, perfluoromethyl, perfluoroethyl, perfluoropropyl, perfluorobutyl, and perfluorohexyl.
  • the cycloalkyl, aryl, and aralkyl groups of the invention can be further substituted with linear or branched C r C 5 alkyl and haloalkyl groups, aryl groups and cycloalkyl groups.
  • R 1 to R 4 independently represent a radical selected from (CH 2 ) n -CH(CF 3 ) 2 -0-Si(Me) 3 , -(CH 2 ) n -CH(CF 3 ) 2 -O-CH 2 -O-CH 3 , -(CH 2 ) n -CH(CF 3 ) 2 -O-C(O)-O-C(CH 3 ) 3 , -(CH 2 ) n -C(CF 3 ) 2 -OH, -(CH 2 ) n C(O)NH 2 , -(CH 2 ) n C(O)CI, -(CH 2 ) n C(0)OR 5 , -(CH 2 ) n -OR 5 , - (CH 2 ) n -OC(O)R 5 , -(CH 2 ) n -C(O)R 5 , -(CH 2 ) n
  • hydrocarbyl groups set forth under the definition of R 5 are the same as those identified above under the definition of R 1 to R 4 .
  • the hydrocarbyl groups defined under R 5 can be halogenated and perhalogenated.
  • R 5 when R 5 is C r C 20 halogenated or perhalogenated alkyl, R 5 can be represented by the formula C ⁇ X" ⁇ , wherein z and X" are defined as above, and at least one X" on the alkyl group must be a halogen (e.g., Br, CI, or F). It is to be recognized that when the alkyl group is perhalogenated, all X" substituents are halogenated.
  • a halogen e.g., Br, CI, or F
  • perhalogenated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, trifluoromethyl, trichloromethyl, -C 7 F 15 , and -C 11 F 23 .
  • perhalogenated aryl groups include, but are not limited to, pentachlorophenyl and pentafluorophenyl.
  • the R 6 radical represents an acid labile moiety selected from -C(CH 3 ) 3 , -Si(CH 3 ) 3 , -CH(R 7 )OCH 2 CH 3 , -CH(R 7 )OC(CH 3 ) 3 or the following cyclic groups:
  • R 7 represents hydrogen or a linear or branched (C, - C 5 ) alkyl group.
  • the alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, /-propyl, butyl, /-butyl, f-butyl, pentyl, t- pentyl and neopentyl.
  • the single bond line projecting from the cyclic groups indicates the position where the cyclic protecting group is bonded to the acid substituent.
  • R 6 radicals include 1-methyl-1-cyclohexyl, isobornyl, 2-methyl-2-isobornyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranoyl, 3-oxocyclohexanonyl, mevalonic lactonyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, and 1-t- butoxy ethyl.
  • the R 6 radical can also represent dicyclopropylmethyl (Dcpm), and dimethylcyclopropylmethyl (Dmcp) groups which are represented by the following structures:
  • R 1 and R 4 together with the two ring carbon atoms to which they are attached can represent a substituted or unsubstituted cycloaliphatic group containing 4 to 30 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group containing 6 to 18 ring carbon atoms or combinations thereof.
  • the cycloaliphatic group can be monocyclic or polycyclic. When unsaturated the cyclic group can contain monounsaturation or multiunsaturation. In one embodiment, the unsaturated cyclic group is a monounsaturated cyclic group.
  • the rings When substituted, the rings contain monosubstitution or multisubstitution wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C 5 alkyl, linear or branched C C 5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C r Cg alkoxy, halogen, or combinations thereof.
  • R 1 and R 4 can be taken together to form the divalent bridging group, -C(O)-Q-(0)C-, which when taken together with the two ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form a pentacyclic ring, wherein Q represents an oxygen atom or the group N(R 8 ), and R 8 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, linear or branched C,- C 10 alkyl, and C 6 -C 18 aryl.
  • each X'" is independently defined as above and m is an integer from 0 to 5.
  • Deuterium enriched norbornene-type monomers wherein at least one of the hydrogen atoms on the norbornene-type moiety and/or one at least one of the hydrogen atoms on a pendant hydrocarbyl substituent described under R 1 to R 4 have been replaced by a deuterium atom are contemplated within the scope of the present invention. In one embodiment, at least 40 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the norbornene-type moiety and/or the hydrocarbyl substituent are replaced by deuterium.
  • the deuterated monomers are represented by the structure below:
  • R D is deuterium
  • i is an integer ranging from 0 to 6, with the proviso that when "i" is 0, at least one of R 1D and R 2D must be present
  • R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrocarbyl or functional substituent as defined above
  • R 1D and R 2D may or may not be present and independently represent a deuterium atom or a deuterium enriched hydrocarbyl group containing at least one deuterium atom.
  • the deuterated hydrocarbyl group is selected from linear or branched C,-C 10 alkyl wherein at least 40 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium.
  • the deuterated hydrocarbyl group is selected from linear or branched C C 10 alkyl wherein at least 50 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium. In yet another embodiment, the deuterated hydrocarbyl group is selected from linear or branched C,-C 10 alkyl wherein at least 60 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium.
  • Crosslinked polymers can be prepared by copolymerizing the norbornene- type monomer(s) set forth under Structure VII above with a multifunctional norbornene-type crosslinking monomer(s).
  • multifunctional norbornene-type crosslinking monomer is meant that the crosslinking monomer contains at least two norbornene-type moieties (norbornene-type double bonds), each functionality being polymerizable in the presence of the catalyst system of the present invention.
  • the crosslinkable monomers include fused multicyclic ring systems and linked multicyclic ring systems. Examples of fused crosslinking agents are illustrated in structures below. For brevity, norbornadiene is included as a fused multicyclic crosslinking agent and is considered to contain two polymerizable norbornene-type double bonds.
  • Y represents a methylene (-CH 2 -) group and m independently represents an integer from 0 to 5, and when m is 0, Y represents a single bond.
  • Representative monomers under the forgoing formulae are set forth below. ⁇ xX ⁇ J 0 K 3
  • a linked multicyclic crosslinking agent is illustrated generically in Structure VIII below.
  • a independently represents a single or double bond
  • m independently is an integer from 0 to 5
  • R 9 is a divalent radical selected from divalent hydrocarbyl radicals, divalent ether radicals and divalent silyl radicals
  • n is equal to 0 or 1.
  • divalent is meant that a free valence at each terminal end of the radical is attached to a norbornene-type moiety.
  • the divalent hydrocarbyl radicals are alkylene radicals and divalent aromatic radicals.
  • the alkylene radicals are represented by the formula -(C d H 2d )- where d represents the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene chain and is an integer from 1 to 10.
  • the alkylene radicals are, in one embodiment, selected from linear or branched (C,-C 10 ) alkylene such as methylene, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, nonylene, and decylene.
  • C,-C 10 linear or branched alkylene radicals
  • a hydrogen atom in the alkylene backbone is replaced with a linear or branched (C 1 to C 5 ) alkyl group.
  • the divalent aromatic radicals are selected from divalent phenyl, and divalent naphthyl radicals.
  • the divalent ether radicals are represented by the group -R 10 -O-R 10 -, wherein R 10 independently is the same as R 9 . Examples of specific linked multicyclic crosslinking agents are represented as in Structures Villa to VI He as follows.
  • the crosslinking agent is selected from those shown below:
  • dimethyl bis[bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene-5-methoxy] silane also referred to herein as dimethyl bis(norbornene methoxy) silane
  • n 1 to 4
  • norbornene-based crosslinking agents include, but are ted to, those represented in formulae a-m below.
  • fluorine-containing norbornene-based cross linkers are used.
  • fluorinated norbornene crosslinking agents can be utilized.
  • Norbornadiene may be employed as a crosslinking agent in this invention. In another embodiment, higher homologs are utilized. Norbornadiene can be converted into higher homologs or Diels-Alder products using a variety of dimerization catalysts or heating it with cyclopentadiene.
  • the crosslinking monomer norbornadiene dimer an alternative synthesis is employed in which norbornadiene is coupled catalytically to yield a mixture of isomers of norbornadiene dimer as shown below:
  • the dimerization of norbornadiene is easily achieved by numerous catalysts to yield a mixed composition of up to six isomers, i.e., Wu et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,545,790).
  • the isomers are the exo-trans-exo, endo-trans-endo, and exo- trans-endo-1 ,4,4a,4b,5,8,8a,8b-ocfa 7y ro-1 ,4:5,8-dimethanobiphenylene ("norbornadiene dimer" or "[NBD] 2 ").
  • the exo-trans-exo norbornadiene dimer is utilized as a crosslinking agent.
  • Heating norbornadiene dimer with dicyclopentadiene or cyclopentadiene can produce higher oligomers of norbornadiene dimer.
  • Other crosslinking agents are prepared by the reaction of cyclopentadiene with olefins containing two or more reactive olefins, e.g., cyclooctadiene, 1 ,5-hexadiene, 1 ,7-octadiene, and tricycloheptatriene.
  • the crosslinkable monomers are those containing two reactive norbornene type moieties (containing two polymerizable double bonds).
  • the monomer is 5,5'-(1 ,2-ethanediyl)bisbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2- ene (NBCH 2 CH 2 NB) prepared by the reaction of 5-(3-butenyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2- ene and cyclopentadiene via a Diels-Alder reaction.
  • the symmetric and asymmetric trimers of cyclopentadiene are also useful crosslinking reagents, i.e., 4, 4a, 4b, 5, 8, 8a, 9, 9a-octahydro-1,4:5,8-dimethano-1H-fluorene and 3a,4, 4a, 5, 8, 8a, 9, 9a-octahydro-4,9:5,8-dimethano-1H-benz[f]indene, respectively.
  • the monomer is obtained from the reaction of cyclopentadiene and norbornadiene, i.e., 1 ,4,4a,5,8,8a-hexahydro-1 ,4:5,8-dimethanonaphthalene.
  • Divinylbenzene and excess cyclopentadiene forms the symmetric crosslinking agent 5,5'-(1,4-phenylene)bisbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene.
  • adducts can be prepared by the thermal pyrolysis of dicyclopentadiene (DCPD) in the presence of a suitable dienophile.
  • DCPD dicyclopentadiene
  • the reaction proceeds by the initial pyrolysis of DCPD to CPD followed by the Diels-Alder addition of CPD and the dienophile to give the adducts shown below:
  • n represents the number of cyclic units in the monomer and R 1 to R 4 independently represent hydrogen, hydrocarbyl, and/or a functional group as previously defined.
  • Norbornadiene and higher Diels-Alder adducts thereof similarly can be prepared by the thermal reaction of CPD and DCPD in the presence of an acetylenic reactant as shown below.
  • Deuterium enriched norbornene-type monomers can be prepared by heating DCPD in the presence of D 2 O and a base such as NaOH to yield deuterated CPD which in turn can be reacted with a dienophile (Eq. 1) or a deuterated dienophile (Eq. 2) to give the respective deuterated norbornene containing a pendant deuterated hydrocarbyl substituent or a pendant hydrocarbyl substituent.
  • non-deuterated CPD can be reacted with a deuterium enriched dienophile to yield norbornene containing a deuterium enriched hydrocarbyl pendant group (Eq. 3).
  • R 1 to R 4 , R 1D and R 2D are as previously defined, and i' is an integer ranging from 1 to 6.
  • polymerizable norbornene-type monomers include but are not limited to norbornene (bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene), 5-ethylidenenorbornene, dicyclopentadiene, tricyclo[5.2.1.0 2 ' 6 ]deca-8-ene, 5-methoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, 5-methylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene-5-carboxylic acid,
  • polymerizable norbornene-type monomers include but are not limited to, norbornene (bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene), 5-methyl-2-norbomene, ethylnorbomene, propylnorbornene, isopropylnorbornene, butylnorbornene, isobutylnorbornene, pentylnorbornene, hexylnorbornene, heptylnorbornene, octylnorbornene, decylnorbornene, dodecylnorbornene, octadecylnorbornene, trimethoxysilylnorbornene, butoxynorbornene, p-tolylnorbomene, methylidene norbornene, phenylnorbornene, ethylidenenorbornene, vinylnorbornene
  • the polymer in another embodiment of the invention can be crosslinked during a post polymerization curing step (latent crosslinking).
  • a norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant post crosslinkable functional group is copolymerized into the polycyclic backbone whereupon the functional group is subsequently crosslinked via well known techniques.
  • post crosslinkable functional group is meant that the functional group is inert to the initial polymerization reaction but is receptive to subsequent chemical reactions to effect the crosslinking of adjacent polymer chains.
  • Suitable post crosslinkable monomers are set forth under Structure VII wherein at least one of R 1 to R 4 is selected from linear or branched C 2 -C 10 alkenyl, C 4 -C 10 cycloalkenyl, -(CH 2 ) n Si(OR 5 ) 3 , wherein n and R 5 are as defined above, R 1 and R 2 or R 3 and R 4 can be taken together to represent a C,-C 10 alkylidenyl radical, fused cyclic groups wherein R 1 and R 4 taken together with the two ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form an unsaturated C 4 to C 8 ring.
  • post crosslinkable alkenyl functional groups include vinyl, butenyl, and cyclohexyl.
  • alkylidenyl groups include methylidenyl and ethylidenyl substituents.
  • alkoxysilyl groups include trimethoxysilyl and triethoxysilyl moieties.
  • crosslinking agents containing fused multicyclic ring systems include dicyclopentadiene (DCPD) and unsymmetrical trimer of cyclopentadiene (CPD).
  • R h represents a non-halogenated, halogenated or perhalogenated group such as CnQ" 2n+1 , n is an integer from 1 to 10, and Q" represents a hydrogen or a halogen (e.g., Br, CI, or F).
  • the latent crosslinkable pendant groups can be reacted via a variety chemistries known to initiate the reaction of the various functional groups.
  • the alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, and alkylidenyl groups set forth under the definition R 1 to R 5 of Structure VII above can be crosslinked via a free radical mechanism.
  • the alkoxysilyl groups can be crosslinked via a cationic reaction mechanism.
  • Representative monomers that contain post crosslinkable functional groups are represented below.
  • the crosslinking reaction step can be induced by a free radical initiator.
  • Suitable initiators are those that can be activated thermally or photochemically.
  • the initiator can be added to the reaction medium and the polymerization of the monomer mixture is allowed to proceed to completion. If the latent initiator is present during polymerization, then a key consideration is that the radical generating compound employed be stable (does not decompose) at the polymerization temperature of the monomeric reaction medium.
  • the latent initiator can be added to a solution of the polymer in an appropriate solvent after the polymerization has been completed.
  • latent crosslinking is induced by exposing the polymer medium to temperatures above the decomposition temperature of the free radical generating compound.
  • latent crosslinking is induced by exposing the polymer medium to a radiation source such as e-beam and UV radiation.
  • Suitable free radical generator compounds include the organic peroxides and aliphatic azo compounds.
  • the aliphatic azo compounds are suitable initiators for the thermal and photochemical activated crosslinking embodiments of the invention, while the organic peroxides are suitable for use in as thermally activated initiators only.
  • the amount of crosslinking agent employed ranges from about 0.005 part by weight to about 5.0 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of monomer in the reaction medium.
  • Suitable organic peroxide include, but are not limited to, dibenzoyl peroxide, di(2,4-dichlorobenzoyl) peroxide, diacetyl peroxide, diisobutyryl peroxide, dilauroyl peroxide, t-butylperbenzoate, -butylperacetate, 2,5-di(benzoylperoxy)-1,2- dimethylhexane, di-f-butyl diperoxyazelate, f-butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, f-amyl peroctoate, 2,5-di(2-ethylhexanoylperoxy)-2,5-dimethylhexane, -butylperoxyneodecanoate, ethyl 3,3-di(f-butylperoxy)butyrate, 2,2-di(£-butylperoxy)butane, 1 ,1-di(f
  • Suitable azo compounds include, but are not limited to, 2,2'-azobis[2,4- dimethyl]pentane, 2-( ⁇ butylazo)-4-methoxy-2,4-dimethylpentanenitrile, 2,2'-azobis(/-butyronitrile), 2-(f-butylazo)-2,4-dimethylpentanenitrile, 2-( -butylazo)/- butyronitrile, 2-(- ; -butylazo)-2-methylbutanenitriIe, 1,1-azobis-cyclohexanecarbonitrile,
  • Suitable photo-initiators for free-radical crosslinking include, but are not limited to, benzoin ethyl ether, diphenyl (2,4,6-trimethyl benzoyl) phosphine oxide, 4,4'- bis(diethylamino) benzophenone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino) benzophenone and 4- (dimethylamino) benzophenone.
  • Suitable photo-initiators for cationic crosslinking include, but are not limited to, onium salts, halogenated organic compounds, quinone diazide compounds, ⁇ , ⁇ - bis(sulfonyl)diazomethane compounds, ⁇ -carbonyl- ⁇ -sulfonyl diazomethane compounds, sulfone compounds, organic acid ester compounds, organic acid amide compounds, organic acid imide compounds, etc.
  • onium salts are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups, diazonium salts with heterocyclic groups, ammonium salts, iodonium salts, sulfonium salts, phosphonium salts, arsonium salts, oxonium salts, etc.
  • counter anions of these onium salts are compounds that can form counter anions. Examples are boric acid, arsenic acid, phosphoric acid, antimonic acid, sulfonic acid, carboxylic acid, and their halides.
  • halogenated organic compound there are no special restrictions to the halogenated organic compound as long as they are halides or organic compounds, and a variety of conventional compounds can be employed.
  • Actual examples include halogen-containing oxadiazole compounds, halogen-containing triazine compounds, halogen-containing acetophenone compounds, halogen-containing benzophenone compounds, halogen-contianing sulfoxide compounds, halogen-containing sulfone compounds, halogen-containing thiazole compounds, halogen-containing oxazole compounds, halogen-containing triazole compounds, haloge-containing 2-pyrone compounds, halogen-containing aliphatic hydrocarbon compounds, halogen-containing aromatic compounds, other halogen-containing heterocyclic compounds, sulfonyl halide compounds, etc.
  • o-quinone diazide compounds are 1 ,2- benzoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid ester, 1 ,2-naphthoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid ester, 1 ,2-naphthoquinone diazido-5-sulfonic acid ester, 1,2-naphthoquinone diazido-6-sulfonic acid ester, 2,1-naphthoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid ester, 2,1- naphthoquinone diazido-5-sulfonic acid ester, 2,1-naphthoquinone diazido-6-sulfonic acid ester, other quinone diazido derivative sulfonic acid esters, 1,2-benzoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid chloride, 1,2-naphthoquinone diazido
  • Examples of ⁇ , ⁇ -bis(sulfonyl)diazomethane compounds are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted ⁇ , ⁇ -bis(sulfonyl)diazomethane with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups, or heterocyclic groups, etc.
  • Actual examples of ⁇ -carbonyl- ⁇ -sulfonyl diazomethane compounds are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted ⁇ -carbonyl- ⁇ -sulfonyl diazomethane with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, arakyl groups, aromatic groups, or heterocyclic groups.
  • sulfone compounds are non-substituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted sulfone compounds or disulfone compounds with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups or heterocyclic groups.
  • organic acid esters are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted carboxylic acid esters, sulfonic acid esters, etc., with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups or heterocyclic groups.
  • organic acid amide groups are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted carboxylic acid amides, sulfonic acid amides, etc., with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups or heterocyclic groups.
  • organic imides are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted carboxylic acid imides, sulfonic acid imides, etc., with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups or heterocyclic groups.
  • One or more of the photo-initiators can be utilized in the present invention.
  • the decomposition temperatures of the foregoing free radical generator compounds are well known in the art and can be selected on the basis of the polymerization temperatures employed in initial reaction. In other words the initiator compound must be stable at the polymerization temperatures so it is available for the post polymerization crosslinking reaction.
  • latent crosslinking is can be effected by thermal or photochemical means.
  • monomers containing trialkoxysilyl groups can be crosslinked by latent crosslinking in the presence of a cationic initiator agent.
  • a polymerization stable cationic initiator can be can be thermally activated to induce the latent crosslinking of the silyl groups.
  • Suitable cationic crosslinking initiators include, for example, dibutyltin dilaurate, dimethyltin dilaurate, and dioctyltin dilaurate.
  • the amount of multifunctional norbornene-type crosslinkable monomers and post crosslinkable monomers that are optionally present in the reaction mixture can range from about 0.1 mole percent to about 50 mole percent based on the total monomer in the monomer mixture to be reacted. In one embodiment, the amount of crosslinking agent ranges from about 1 mole percent to about 25 mole percent of the total monomer mixture. In another embodiment,the amount of crosslinking agent ranges from about 1 mole percent to about 10 mole percent of the total monomer mixture.
  • the monomers of the invention are polymerized in solution or in mass.
  • the catalyst is added to the reaction medium containing the desired monomer(s) as a preformed single component catalyst or the catalyst can be formed in situ by admixing the pro-catalyst component, the Group 15 electron donor component, and the WCA salt activator component in the reaction medium.
  • the pro-catalyst is ligated with the Group 15 electron donor component, it is not necessary to employ the Group 15 electron donor as a separate component.
  • the ligated pro-catalyst component e.g., containing desired ligand group(s)
  • the WCA salt activator component is admixed with the WCA salt activator component in the reaction medium.
  • a pro-catalyst component with or without ligands is admixed with a desired ligand containing component(s) and the WCA salt activator component in the reaction medium.
  • the pro-catalyst components are generically exemplified in the preformed catalyst preparation equations (1) to (4) set forth above.
  • the molar ratio of pro-catalyst (based on the Group 10 metal) : Group 15 electron donor component : WCA salt is 1:1-10:1-100.
  • the ratio is 1 :1 -5:1 -20.
  • the ratio is 1 :1-2:1-5.
  • the molar ratio of pro-catalyst (based on the metal content) to WCA salt is 1:1-100. In another embodiment, the ratio is 1 :1-20. In yet another embodiment, the ratio is 1:1-5.
  • the order of addition of the various catalyst components to the reaction medium is not important.
  • the polymers prepared by the process of the invention are addition polymers of polycycloolefinic repeating units linked through 2,3-enchainment.
  • the repeating units are polymerized from a polycycloolefin monomer or combination of polycycloolefin monomers that contain at least one norbornene-type moiety as described herein.
  • the polymerization reaction can be carried out by adding a solution of the preformed catalyst or individual catalyst components to a solution of the cycloolefin monomer or mixtures of monomers to be polymerized.
  • the amount of monomer in solvent in one embodiment, ranges from 10 to 50 weight percent. In another embodiment, the amount of monomer in solvent ranges from 20 to 30 weight percent.
  • the reaction medium is agitated (e.g., stirred) to ensure complete mixing of catalyst and monomer components.
  • the polymerization reaction temperatures can range from about 0°C to about 150°C. In another embodiment, the polymerization reaction temperatures can range from about 10°C to about 100°C. In yet another embodiment, the polymerization reaction temperatures can range from about 20°C to about 80°C.
  • solvents for the polymerization reaction include but are not limited to alkane and cycloakane solvents such as pentane, hexane, heptane, and cyclohexane; halogenated alkane solvents such as dichloromethane, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, ethylchloride, 1,1-dichloroethane, 1 ,2-dichloroethane, 1- chloropropane, 2-chloropropane, 1-chlorobutane, 2-chlorobutane, 1-chloro-2-methylpropane, and 1-chloropentane; aromatic solvents such as benzene, xylene, toluene, mesitylene, chlorobenzene, anisole and o-dichlorobenzene, Freon ® 112 halocarbon solvent, water; or mixtures thereof.
  • the solvent is selected from cyclohexane, toluen
  • the Group 15 electron donor ligand or component may be chosen from the water soluble phosphines set forth above, although this is not a strict requirement.
  • the polymerization reaction can be conducted in suspension or emulsion.
  • the monomers are suspended in an aqueous medium containing a suspension agent selected from one or more water soluble substances such as, for example, polyvinyl alcohol, cellulose ether, partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate, or gelatin and then carrying out the reaction in the presence of the catalyst system of the invention.
  • the emulsion polymerization can in general be carried out by emulsifying the monomers in water or a mixed solvent of water and a water-miscible organic solvent (such as methanol, or ethanol). In one embodiment, this is done in the presence of at least one emulsifying agent. Then, the emulsion polymerization is carried out in the presence of the catalyst as discussed herein.
  • Emulsifying agents include, for example, mixed acid soaps containing fatty and rosin acids, alkyl sulfonate soaps and soaps of oligomeric naphthalene sulfonates.
  • At least one monomer component e.g., at least one cycloolefinic monomer
  • the mass polymerization process according to the invention polymerizes at least one monomer crosslinking component (e.g., at least one cycloolefinic crosslinking monomer) using a catalyst system.
  • the mass polymerization process according to the invention is a two component monomer system (i.e. at least two cycloolefinic monomers of which none, one or two can be a crosslinking monomer) which is polymerized using a catalyst system.
  • the mass polymerization process according to the invention is at least a three component monomer system (i.e. at least two cycloolefinic monomers of which at least one of which is a crosslinking monomoer) which is polymerized using a catalyst system.
  • the term mass polymerization refers to a polymerization reaction which is generally carried out in the substantial absence of a solvent. In some cases, however, a small proportion of solvent is present in the reaction medium. Small amounts of solvent can be conveyed to the reaction medium via the introduction of the catalyst system components which are in some cases dissolved in solvent.
  • Solvents also can be employed in the reaction medium to reduce the viscosity of the polymer at the termination of the polymerization reaction to facilitate the subsequent use and processing of the polymer.
  • the amount of solvent that can be present in the reaction medium ranges from 0 to about 20 percent based on the weight of the monomer(s) present in the reaction mixture. In another embodiment, the amount of solvent that can be present in the reaction medium ranges from 0 to about 10 percent based on the weight of the monomer(s) present in the reaction mixture. In still another embodiment, the amount of solvent present that can be in the reaction medium ranges from 0 to about 1 percent, based on the weight of the monomer(s) present in the reaction mixture. In one embodiment, the solvent or solvents utilized are chosen such that the catalyst system components dissolve therein.
  • solvents include, but are not limited to, alkane and cycloalkane solvents such as pentane, hexane, heptane, and cyclohexane; halogenated alkane solvents such as dichloromethane, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, ethylchloride, 1 ,1-dichloroethane, 1 ,2-dichloroethane, 1-chloropropane, 2-chloropropane, 1-chlorobutane, 2- chlorobutane, 1-chloro-2-methylpropane, and 1-chloropentane; esters such as ethylacetate, /-amylacetate; ethers such as THF and diethylether; aromatic solvents such as benzene, xylene, toluene, mesitylene, chlorobenzene, anisole and o-dichlorobenzene; and halocarbon solvents such as
  • the solvent or solvents is/are selected from benzene, fluorobenzene, o-difluorobenzene, p-difluorobenzene, pentafluorobenzene, hexafluorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, chlorobenzene, toluene, o-, m-, and p- xylenes, mesitylene, cyclohexane, ethylacetate, THF, and dichloromethane.
  • a ligated pro-catalyst containing a Group 15 electron donor ligand is prepared in solvent and then added to the desired monomer or mixture of monomers containing the dissolved WCA salt activator.
  • the reaction mixture is mixed and the reaction is permitted to proceed from about 1 minute to about 2 hours.
  • the reaction mixture can be optionally heated at a temperature ranging from about 20 °C to about 200 °C.
  • the polymerization temperature is not specifically limited. In one embodiment, the polymerization temperature is in the range of 20 °C to 120 °C. In another embodiment, the polymerization temperature is in the range of 20 °C to 90 °C.
  • the polymerization reaction can be carried out under an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon.
  • an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon.
  • the catalyst system components of the invention are moisture and oxygen insensitive, allowing for less stringent handling and processing conditions.
  • Post curing of the polymers of the present invention is, in one embodiment, conducted at elevated temperatures for a time period sufficient to reach a desired conversion of monomer to polymer.
  • the post curing cycle is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C.
  • the post curing cycle is conducted for about 0.5 to about 4 hours at a over a temperature range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C.
  • the post curing cycle is conducted for 1 to 2 hours over a temperature range of from about 125 °C to about 200 °C.
  • the post curing cycle is conducted for 1 to 2 hours over a temperature range of from about 140 °C to about 180 °C.
  • the cure cycle can be effected at a constant temperature or the temperature can be ramped, e.g., incrementally increasing the curing temperature from a desired minimum curing temperature to a desired maximum curing temperature over the desired curing cycle time range.
  • the temperature ramping can be effected by following a gradual increasing slope on a temperature vs. time plot from the desired minimum temperature to the desired maximum temperature in the cure cycle. In this embodiment when the maximum temperature is reached, the temperature maximum can optionally be held for a desired period of time until the desired cure state is attained.
  • the temperature ramping can follow a stepwise curve on a temperature vs. time plot.
  • the temperature ramping proceeds in step fashion from the desired minimum cure temperature to the desired maximum cure temperature in the cure cycle.
  • the post cure can be effected by combining post cure embodiments (A and B) wherein the cure cycle encompasses a combination of steps and slopes from the desired minimum cure temperature to the desired maximum cure temperature.
  • the cure cycle can follow a curve from the desired minimum cure temperature to the desired maximum cure temperature.
  • the rise and run of the slope do not have to be constant between the minimum and maximum cure temperatures of the cure cycle. In other words the rise and run can vary when proceeding from the desired minimum to desired maximum cure temperatures
  • the foregoing cure cycle temperature ramping curves are illustrated below.
  • Ramping of the temperature during the cure cycle is advantageous because it diminishes the potential for catalyst degradation and the volatilization of unconverted monomer.
  • the polymerization and the post-curing are both conducted together.
  • the polymerization/post-cure is conducted for 1 to 2 hours at a temperature in the range of from about 20 °C to about 200 °C.
  • the polymerization/post cure is conducted for 1 to 2 hours at a temperature in the range of from about 125 °C to about 200 °C.
  • the post curing cycle is conducted for 1 to 2 hours over a temperature range of from about 140 °C to about 180 °C.
  • the polymerization/post-cure can be conducted at more than one temperature (i.e. within a range of temperatures).
  • the polymerization/post-cure can be conducted over a range of temperatures similar to the ranges given immediately above. If the polymerization/post-cure is being conducted within a range of temperatures, the temperature at which the polymerization/post-cure is being conducted can be altered according to the discussion had above with regard to temperature ramping.
  • additives may include, but are not limited to, those selected from pigments, dyes, non-linear optical dyes, erbium complexes, praseodymium complexes, neodymium complexes, plasticizers, lubricants, flame retardants, tackifiers, antioxidants (e.g., Irganox ® 1010, 1076, 3114, or Cyanox ® 1790), UV stabilizers, masking agents, odor absorbing agents, crosslinking agents, synergists (e.g., Irgafos ® 168, thiodipropionic acid dilauryl ester, or a combination of both), tougheners and impact modifiers, polymeric modifiers and viscosifiers and mixtures thereof (e.g., poly-iso-butylene, EPDM rubbers, siloxane oligomers and mixtures thereof), can be added by mixing one or more of them into the monomer medium . before the polymerization
  • the optional additives are employed to enhance the processing, appearance and/or the physical properties of the polymer.
  • the additives can be utilized to enhance and modify inter alia the coefficient of thermal expansion, stiffness, impact strength, dielectric constant, solvent resistance, color, optical properties and odor of the polymer product.
  • the viscosifiers are employed to modify the viscosity and shrinkage of the monomeric mixture before the polymerization reaction is initiated. Suitable viscosity modifiers include elastomers and the norbornene-type polymers of the present invention.
  • the viscosity modifiers can be dissolved in the polymerizable monomers of the invention to increase the viscosity of the monomer reaction mixture.
  • crosslinking can be effected during the initial polymerization reaction of the monomer mixture or during a post polymerization thermal or photochemical curing step.
  • the molar ratio of monomer to pro-catalyst (based on metal content) to WCA salt activator ratios ranges from about 500,000:1 :1 to about 5,000:1:20. In another embodiment, the molar ratio of monomer to pro-catalyst (based on metal content) to WCA salt activator ratios ranges from about 250,000:1:5 to about 20,000:1 :10. In yet another embodiment, the molar ratio of monomer to pro-catalyst (based on metal content) to WCA salt activator ratios ranges from about 200,000:1 :20 to about 100,000:1 :1.
  • the polymer compositions for use in the present invention have from about 100 to about 100,000 repeating units as defined above by one or more of Structures VII, Vila and Vllb. In another embodiment, the polymer compositions for use in the present invention have from about 500 to about 50,000 repeating units as defined above by one or more of Structures VII, Vila and Vllb. In yet another embodiment, the polymer compositions for use in the present invention have from about 1,000 to about 10,000 repeating units as defined above by one or more of Structures VII, Vila and Vllb.
  • a waveguide is formed using one of the methods disclosed below with at least two polyacrylate, polyimide, benzocyclobutene, cyclic olefin polymers, such that the core material and the clad material have a difference in their indices of refraction at 830 nm ( ⁇ n at 830 nm), core versus clad, of at least 0.00075 or more (or at least 0.05% when the clad refractive index is 1.5). That is, the refractive index of the polymer core layer is at least 0.05% greater than the refractive index of the at least one polymer cladding layer.
  • the cladding layers may be different polymers layers so long as both cladding layers have a refractive index which is at least 0.05% less than that of the polymer used to form the core layer.
  • both the core and cladding polymer layers of the optical waveguide of the present invention are formulated to include at least one cyclic olefin monomer (e.g., at least one norbornene-type monomers) and/or at least one crosslinking monomer, at least one pro-catalyst (see the discussion of pro-catalysts above under the Catalyst Preparation heading), at least one co-catalyst (i.e., a WCA salt having a weakly coordinating ion, see above), and optionally one or more of the additives discussed above (see the discussion under the Mass Process heading).
  • Such a mixture is polymerized using the above-described mass polymerization process (see the discussion under the Mass Process heading) by either adding the pro-catalyst to a mixture containing the at least one cyclic olefin monomer, the co-catalyst, and any optional additives, or by adding the co-catalyst to a mixture containing the at least one cyclic olefin monomer, the pro-catalyst, and any optional additives. In both these situations the active catalyst is generated in situ.
  • each of the clad and core formulations (which differ to the extent necessary to produce the required difference in their respective refractive indices) is formed from a 2-component system. That is, the clad formulation is produced from at least two components, Components A and B. On the other hand, the core formulation is also produced from at least two components,
  • Components C and D Each of components A through D contain at least one norbornene-type monomer.
  • Components A and B are two substantially identical mixtures of the at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking monomer.
  • the difference between Components A and B generally arises from the inclusion of a pro-catalyst in Component A versus the inclusion of a co-catalyst in Component B. Additional differences between Component A and Component B may exist.
  • Component A may contain an optional additive not present in Component B, or vice versa.
  • Component A comprises at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking monomer, at least one pro-catalyst and optionally an additive as discussed above (such as an antioxidant).
  • Component B comprises the same norbornene-type monomer(s), the same crosslinking agent(s), at least one co-catalyst, and optionally an additive (such as an antioxidant) and/or a synergist.
  • polymerization is conducted using the Mass Process polymerization method by mixing equal amounts of Components A and B, thereby generating the active polymerization catalyst in situ.
  • each of the clad and/or clad formulations may be a one part mixture in which at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking monomer, at least one co-catalyst, and any optional additives are present. To cause the polymerization reaction to occur a pro-catalyst is added to the above mixture(s).
  • each of the core and/or clad formulations may be a one part mixture in which at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking agent, at least one pro-catalyst, and any optional additives are present. To cause the polymerization reaction to occur a co-catalyst is added to the above mixture(s).
  • the clad and core formulations differ with respect to the at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking monomer present therein. It is this difference, in one embodiment, that permits the formation of polymers having the necessary difference in their respective refractive indices.
  • each of the clad and/or core formulations contain at least one norbornene-type crosslinking monomer (as discussed above), at least one co-catalyst and any optional additives as discussed above.
  • a pro-catalyst is added to the above mixture(s).
  • the above mixture could be divided into two or more portions and the co-catalyst added to one portion while the pro-catalyst is added to another portion. In this instance, polymerization is accomplished by the combination of all of the portions.
  • each of the core and/or clad formulation may be a one part mixture in which at least one norbornene-type crosslinking monomer, at least one pro-catalyst, and any optional additives are present.
  • a co-catalyst is added to the above mixture(s).
  • the above mixture could be divided into two or more portions and the co-catalyst added to one portion while the pro-catalyst is added to another portion.
  • polymerization is accomplished by the combination of all of the portions.
  • exemplary clad and core formulations It should be noted that these formations are exemplary in nature and are not meant to serve as an exhaustive list of the possible formulations for each of the clad and core. Rather, other clad and core formulations can be produced in view of the above disclosure so long as the refractive index of the polymer produced using the core formulation is at least 0.05% larger than that of the polymer produced using the clad formulation.
  • the clad formulation contains: (1) one norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant C 4 to C 20 alkyl group, (2) one norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant C 1 to C 10 alkoxysilyl group, and (3) at least one crosslinking agent (as disclosed above).
  • the clad formulation also contains at least one pro-catalyst, at least one co-catalyst, and optionally an additive or additives as discussed above. As noted above, if components (1), (2) and (3) are all present in one mixture then either the pro-catalyst or the co-catalyst is held out of the mixture and added to the mixture at a later time.
  • components (1), (2) and (3) can be divided into two or more portions and the pro-catalyst added to one portion to form Component A (which can optionally include an additive or additives).
  • Component A which can optionally include an additive or additives.
  • Component B which can optionally include the same, different or additional additives as Component A.
  • Polymerization is accomplished in this embodiment by combining Component A and Component B
  • component (3) is at least one crosslinking agent selected from dimethyl bis(norbornenemethoxy) silane, octamethyl 1,8- bis(norbornenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane, bis(norbornenemethyl)acetal or a fluorinated crosslinking agent (such as F-Crosslinking Agents I and II shown above).
  • crosslinking agent selected from dimethyl bis(norbornenemethoxy) silane, octamethyl 1,8- bis(norbornenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane, bis(norbornenemethyl)acetal or a fluorinated crosslinking agent (such as F-Crosslinking Agents I and II shown above).
  • the core formulation contains: (1) one norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant C 4 to C 20 alkyl group, (2) one norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant silane group with at least one C 6 to C 12 aryl group attached to the Si atom of the silane group, and (3) at least one crosslinking agent (as disclosed above).
  • the core formulation also contains at least one pro-catalyst, at least one co-catalyst, and optionally an antioxidant and/or a synergist.
  • components (1), (2) and (3) are all present in one mixture than either the pro-catalyst or the co-catalyst is held out of the mixture and added to the mixture at a later time.
  • components (1), (2) and (3) can be divided into two or more portions and the pro-catalyst added to one portion to form Component A (which can optionally include an additive such an antioxidant).
  • the other portion of components (1), (2) and (3) can be combined with the co-catalyst to form Component B (which can optionally include an additive such as an antioxidant and/or a synergist).
  • component (3) is at least one crosslinking agent selected from dimethyl bis(norbornenemethoxy) silane, octamethyl 1,8- bis(norbornenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane, bis(norbornenemethyl)acetal or a fluorinated crosslinking agent (such as F-Crosslinking Agents I and II shown above).
  • crosslinking agent selected from dimethyl bis(norbornenemethoxy) silane, octamethyl 1,8- bis(norbornenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane, bis(norbornenemethyl)acetal or a fluorinated crosslinking agent (such as F-Crosslinking Agents I and II shown above).
  • the molar ratio, stated in mole percent, of component (1):component (2):component (3) in either the clad or core formulation is 60-90:5-
  • the molar percent ratio of component (1):component (2):component (3) is 65-85:7.5-20:7.5-17.5. In still another embodiment, the molar ratio of component (1):component (2):component (3) is 75- 85:10-20:5-15.
  • compositions of the present invention are detailed descriptions of methods of preparation and use of certain compositions of the present invention.
  • the detailed preparation descriptions fall within the scope of, and serve to exemplify, the more generally described compositions and formulations set forth above.
  • Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate is sometimes referred to in shorthand as LiFABA (see for example Table 2), and (allyl)palladium(tricyclohexylphosphine)trifluoroacetate is referred to as Allyl Pd-PCy 3 TFA.
  • Norbornene methanol (108.5 g, 0.87 mol.) is added dropwise to bis(dimethylamino) dimethyl silane (63.97g, 0.43 mol.) in a reactor which is connected to a scrubber containing dilute hydrochloric acid. The reaction mixture is stirred for about 4 hours. The mixture is then connected to a vacuum, and residual amounts of the amine are removed. Pure product is obtained by distillation under vacuum (117g, -90% yield).
  • Norbornenemethanol (21.2g, 0.17 mol.) is added dropwise to a solution consisting of octamethyl dichlorotetrasiloxane (30g, 0.085 mol.), triethyl amine (21g, 0.21 mol.) and toluene (300 mL).
  • the reaction mixture is stirred for 8 hours at room temperature.
  • the solids that are formed (triethylamine hydrochloride) are filtered off.
  • the toluene solution is then washed 3 times with small amounts of distilled water and the crude product is obtained by removing the toluene. Pure product is obtained by distillation under vacuum (39g, ⁇ 87% yield).
  • CL1 Cladding Formulation using octamethyl 1 ,8-bis(norbomenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane: Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0200g, 2.3x10 "5 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of monomers consisting of hexylnorbornene (10g, 0.056 mol.) octamethyl 1,8-bis(norbornenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane (3.9g, 8.6 mmol.) and triethoxysilylnorbornene (2.9g, 0.011mol.). To the mixture is added 0.17g of Irganox ® 1076 (1 % by weight). To this mixture, is added 0.16 mL of catalyst stock solution (3.02 x10 "6 mol.).
  • Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained.
  • Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0042g, 4.8x10 6 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of monomers consisting of hexylnorbonene (5g, 0.028 mol.), bis(norbomenemethyl)acetal (1.57, 6.1 mmol.) and triethoxysilylnorbornene (1.54, 6.1 mmol.).
  • To this mixture is added 0.08g of Irganox ® 1076 (1 % by weight).
  • Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained.
  • CL3 Cladding Formulation using F-Crosslinkinq Agent I:
  • Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0061 g, 6.9x10 6 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of monomers consisting of hexyl norbonene (6.2g, 0.035 mol), F-Crosslinking Agent I (3.2g, 4.3 mmol.) and triethoxysilylnorbornene
  • Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0061 g, 6.9x10 6 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of monomers consisting of hexyl norbonene (6.2g,
  • Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained.
  • Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0689g, 7.91 x 10 ⁇ 5 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of triethoxysilyl norbornene (9.5g, 0.037 mol.) and dimethyl bis(norbornene methoxy) silane (7.5g, 0.0247mol.).
  • hexyl norbornene 33g, 0.185 mol.
  • Irganox ® 1076 0.50g
  • 0.25 g of Irgafos ® 168 is added as a synergist. Equal amounts of Components A and B are mixed together and are cured.
  • Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained.
  • Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0658g, 7.55 x 10 5 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of diphenyl methyl (norbornene methoxy) silane (11.3g, 0.035 mol.) and dimethyl bis(norbomene methoxy) silane (7.5g, 0.0247 mol.) and hexyl norbornene (31.5g, 0.18 mol.).
  • Irganox ® 1076 (0.50g).
  • 0.25 g of Irgafos ® 168 is added as a synergist.
  • Equal amounts of Components A and B are mixed together and are cured. Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained.
  • the monomer formulations of the present invention are polymerized at a temperature of about
  • the polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 120 °C for about 1 to about 40 minutes. In yet another embodiment, polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 40 °C to about 80 °C for about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes.
  • the polymerization reaction can be carried out under an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon. In another embodiment, the polymerization can be carried out in a forced air, vented oven.
  • the polymer may be subjected to a post curing step.
  • the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours at a temperature range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C (as noted above the temperature during post-cure can be increased over time). Additionally, in another embodiment, post-cure can be conducted for about 0.5 to about 4 hours at a temperature in the range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C. In another embodiment, the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range (or at a temperature in the range) of from about 125 °C to about
  • the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range of (or at a temperature in the range) from about 140 °C to about 180 °C.
  • Partial Cure/Cure/Post Cure In another embodiment, at least one monomer formulation (e.g., either a core composition or a cladding (or clad) composition) is partially polymerized (cured) to gel point at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 120 °C for about 0.1 to about 10 minutes. In another embodiment, the polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 40 °C to about 100 °C for about 1 to about 8 minutes.
  • polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 50 °C to about 70 °C for about 2 minutes to about 6 minutes.
  • the polymerization reaction can be carried out under an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon.
  • the polymerization can be carried out in a forced air, vented oven.
  • At least one more monomer formulation (not cured) can be placed over or on top of the partially cured monomer formulation(s).
  • at least one core composition is subjected to partial cure
  • at least one clad composition is placed over the at least one core composition.
  • at least one core composition is placed over the at least one core composition.
  • the at least one monomer formulation which is placed over the at least one partially cured monomer formulation can be another similar formulation (i.e., at least one additional core formulation over the at least one partially cured core formulation, etc.).
  • the combination is cured at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 200 °C for about 1 minute to about 2 hours.
  • the polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 120 °C for about 1 to about 40 minutes.
  • polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 40 °C to about 80 °C for about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes.
  • the polymerization reaction can be carried out under an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon.
  • the polymerization can be carried out in a forced air, vented oven.
  • the polymer combination may be subjected to a post curing step.
  • the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours at a temperature range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C (as noted above the temperature during post-cure can be increased over time).
  • post- cure can be conducted for about 0.5 to about 4 hours at a temperature in the range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C.
  • the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range (or at a temperature in the range) of from about 125 °C to about 200 °C.
  • the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range of (or at a temperature in the range) from about 140 °C to about 180 °C.
  • FIG. 1 is a generic process of making a waveguide 1.
  • a cladding film 12 (sub-cladding) is formed by casting against a master 10 (a nickel master or other suitable master) in a molding process such as injection molding, hot embossing and reactive casting (see (a) of Figure 1) and subsequenting subjected to curing.
  • the sub-cladding layer 12 is removed from the master 10 (see (b) of Figure 1) and a liquid core material 14 is then applied onto the featured side of the sub-cladding film 12 and forced into the grooves by pressure using, for example, a Doctor blade 16 (see (c) of Figure 1).
  • the liquid core material 14 is cured to form a ribbed waveguide structure 14a (see (d) of Figure 1).
  • the waveguide structure depicted in Figure 1 is ribbed.
  • any suitable waveguide structure can be formed (e.g., a web, lattice, matrix, buried channels, etc.).
  • a top cladding layer 18 is formed over a portion or all of the waveguide structure 14a by a depositing thereupon a liquid clad material which upon curing forms the top cladding layer 18 (see (e) of Figure 1).
  • the top cladding layer 18 may be formed independently rather than being polymerized from a liquid formulation placed on top of the waveguide structure 14a, and optionally a portion of the sub-cladding layer 12.
  • the top cladding layer 18 may be joined to the exposed portion of the waveguide structure 14a using a suitable adhesive attachment means (e.g., a layer of liquid cladding material which acts as a glue).
  • a suitable adhesive attachment means e.g., a layer of liquid cladding material which acts as a glue.
  • the method of Figure 1 can be halted after step (d) has been completed. In such a case, a two layer waveguide is obtained rather than the three layer wave guide discussed above.
  • this conventional clad-first approach results in the production of two and three layer waveguides. Additionally, this conventional clad-first approach can yield a variety of waveguide structures such as an array of buried rib waveguides, as shown in Figures 2A to 2C. A careful balance of the dimensions (height, width, spacing, and thickness of the slab region) of the rib guides, along with control over the difference in the refractive index between the core and clad layers, and the operating wavelength can lead to a waveguide structure in which light is well confined ( Figures 2B and 2C).
  • core/clad compositions disclosed herein can be used in other prior art waveguide formation methods (e.g., micro-molding/embossing; reactive ion etching; UV laser and e-beam writing; photochemical delineation; photo-bleaching; induced dopant diffusion (photo-induced dopant diffusion, photolocking and selective polymerization); selective poling of electro-optically active molecules induced by an electric field; and polymerization of self-assembled prepolymers
  • waveguide formation methods e.g., micro-molding/embossing; reactive ion etching; UV laser and e-beam writing; photochemical delineation; photo-bleaching; induced dopant diffusion (photo-induced dopant diffusion, photolocking and selective polymerization); selective poling of electro-optically active molecules induced by an electric field; and polymerization of self-assembled prepolymers
  • the master used in this embodiment may have a waveguide structure whose channels are actually bigger than desired in the final product.
  • Such features permit a non-stick coating (e.g., PTFE) or a mold-release agent to be applied over the master so as to facilitate removal of the sub-cladding layer 12 from the master 10.
  • separation of the sub-cladding layer from the master may be facilitated by running cold water over the sub-cladding layer.
  • a waveguide even an isolated buried channel wave guide
  • the method will be discussed in relation to an isolated buried channel waveguide.
  • other waveguide structures such as a ribbed structure.
  • the fabrication steps in the core-first approach are executed in reverse order, as shown in Figure 3.
  • the general process is described as follows. A mixture of a core material 30 is poured onto the surface of a master 32 (e.g., Ni, Si masters, etc.) having grooves 34 formed in the shape and dimensions of the desired waveguide pre-structure (see (a) and
  • the channels are from about 1 ⁇ m to about 200 ⁇ m in width and from about 1 ⁇ m to about 200 ⁇ m in height.
  • any desired thickness and height may be obtained so long as the channels are neither too narrow or too shallow to accept the core material.
  • a Doctor blade 36 is set to rest directly on the surface of the master (where a buried structure is desired) and used to scrape away the excess liquid core mixture 30 (see (b) of Figure 3).
  • the core material 30 left in the grooves is cured to form at least one waveguide structure 30a. If the core material 30 is one of the core materials described above, the core material 30 can be cured in accordance with any one of the above-mentioned methods.
  • a mixture of a cladding material 38 is poured onto the top of the core containing master so as to cover the at least one exposed surface of the waveguide structure(s) 30a.
  • the thickness of the sub-cladding layer is also controlled by a Doctor blade 36 (see (d) of Figure 3).
  • a sub-clad layer 40 is formed which is in contact with at least one surface of the waveguide structure(s) (see (e) of Figure 3).
  • the sub-clad layer 40/waveguide structure(s) 30a combination is removed from the master 32 and flipped over so that the sub-clad layer is on the bottom (see (f) of Figure 3).
  • the thickness of sub-clad layer is sufficient to allow for the removal of the sub-clad layer 40 and the waveguide structure(s) 30a from the master 32 without causing damage thereto.
  • the thickness of the each clad (sub-clad and top clad) is from about 2 ⁇ m to about 20,000 ⁇ m or are in total about 4 ⁇ m to about 20,000 ⁇ m.
  • each clad layer is about 10 ⁇ m to about 10,000 ⁇ m, or are in total about 20 ⁇ m to about 10,000 ⁇ m. It should be noted that the height of the top-clad by definition includes the height of the core layer (see (h) of Figure 3).
  • a top cladding material 42 is applied to the core side of the film and the thickness thereof is also controlled by a Doctor blade 36 (see (g) of Figure 3).
  • top cladding material 42 is cured to form a top cladding layer 42a.
  • a waveguide 50 is formed (see (h) of Figure 3). It should be noted, that curing of this third layer results in a three-layer polymer film containing isolated channel waveguide core 30a buried between the sub-cladding layer 40 and the top cladding layer 42a.
  • step (f) is complete.
  • the master used in this embodiment may have a core structure(s) which are actually bigger than desired in the final product.
  • Such features permit a non-stick coating (e.g., PTFE) or a moid-release agent to be applied over the master to help facilitate the removal of the core structures 30a and the sub- cladding layer 40 from the master 32.
  • a non-stick coating e.g., PTFE
  • a moid-release agent e.g., PTFE
  • separation of the sub-cladding layer from the master is facilitated by running cold water over the sub-cladding layer.
  • this core-first approach makes the core structures of waveguides by casting on a master (e.g., Ni or Si) that has no interaction with the liquid core precursor.
  • Figure 4A shows a two-layer isolated channel waveguide structure
  • Figure 4B shows a three-layer buried channel waveguide structure
  • Figure 4C is a schematic diagram of the end view of the waveguide array of Figure 4B (dimensions 13 ⁇ m wide, 16 ⁇ m tall, spaced by 13 ⁇ m) with the position of an input optical fiber shown as a shaded circle
  • the output pattern shows that the guide is multimode at 820 nm and there is no cross coupling between adjacent guides.
  • the core-first method is also applicable to any other suitable polymer system which include, but are not limited to, polyacrylates (such as deuterated polyfluoro- methacrylate), polyimides (such as cross-linked polyimides or fluorinated polyimides), or benzocyclobutene.
  • polyacrylates such as deuterated polyfluoro- methacrylate
  • polyimides such as cross-linked polyimides or fluorinated polyimides
  • benzocyclobutene benzocyclobutene.
  • the above-mentioned core first method can be modified to take advantage of the previously discussed partial cure/cure/postcure polymerization method (see above).
  • the method will be discussed in relation to an isolated buried channel waveguide.
  • This modified core first method will be discussed with reference to Figures 6, 7A and 7B.
  • the general modified core first process is described as follows. A mixture of a core material 60 is poured onto the surface of a master 62 (e.g., Ni, Si masters, etc.) having grooves 64 formed in the shape and dimensions of the desired waveguide structure (see (a) and (b)).
  • a master 62 e.g., Ni, Si masters, etc.
  • the channels are from about 1 ⁇ m to about 200 ⁇ m in width and from about 1 ⁇ m to about 200 ⁇ m in height.
  • any desired thickness and height may be obtained so long as the channels are neither too narrow or too shallow to accept the core material.
  • a Doctor blade 66 is set to rest directly on the surface of the master (where a buried structure is desired) and used to scrape away the excess liquid core mixture 60 (see (b) of Figure 6).
  • the core material 60 left in the grooves is partially cured to form at least one pre-waveguide structure 60a. If the core material 60 is one of the core materials described above, the core material 60 is partially cured in accordance with the above-mentioned partial cure/cure/post cure method.
  • a mixture of a cladding material 68 is poured onto the top of the core containing master so as to cover the at least one exposed surface of the waveguide structure(s) 60a.
  • the thickness of the sub-cladding layer is also controlled by a Doctor blade 66 (see (d) of Figure 6).
  • a sub-clad film 70 is formed which is in contact with at least one surface of the waveguide structure(s) (see (e) of Figure 6).
  • the sub-clad layer 70/waveguide structure(s) 60a combination is removed from the master 62 and flipped over so that the sub- clad layer is on the bottom (see (f) of Figure 6).
  • the thickness of sub-clad layer is sufficient to allow for the removal of the sub-clad layer 70 and the waveguide structure(s) 60a from the master 62 without causing damage thereto.
  • the thickness of the each clad (sub-clad and top clad) is from about 2 ⁇ m to about 20,000 ⁇ m or are in total 4 ⁇ m to about 20,000 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of each clad layer is about 10 ⁇ m to about 10,000 ⁇ m, or are in total about 20 ⁇ m to about 10,000 ⁇ m. It should be noted that the height of the top-clad by definition includes the height of the core layer (see (h) of Figure 6).
  • a top cladding material 72 is applied to the core side of the film and the thickness thereof is also controlled by a Doctor blade 66 (see (g) of Figure 6).
  • top cladding material 72 is cured to form a top cladding layer 72a.
  • a waveguide 75 is formed (see (h) of Figure 6). It should be noted, that curing of this third layer results in a three-layer polymer film containing isolated channel waveguide core 60a buried between the sub-cladding layer 70 and the top cladding layer 72a.
  • step (f) is complete.
  • the master used in this embodiment may have a core structure ⁇ ) which are actually bigger than desired in the final product.
  • Such features permit a non-stick coating (e.g., PTFE) or a mold-release agent to be applied over the master to help facilitate the removal of the core structures 60a and the sub- cladding layer 70 from the master 62.
  • separation of the sub-cladding layer from the master is facilitated by running cold water over the sub-cladding layer.
  • this modified core-first approach also makes the core structures of waveguides by casting on a master (e.g., Ni or Si) that has no interaction with the liquid core precursor.
  • This modification in the fabrication process permits the complete removal of the slab region of the core layer and also enables an easy filling of fine channels by using a low-viscosity core prepolymer mixture, which simplifies the production of isolated, buried channel waveguides.
  • the modified core-first method reduces the amount of curing time necessary to produce a waveguide and reduces the amount of evaporation of the liquid core layer during the curing process thereby yielding fully filled buried waveguide structures.
  • Optical micrographs of samples of two two-layer waveguide structures made using the core-first method ( Figure 7A) and the modified core first method ( Figure 7B) confirm that the modified core-first method permits the formation of fully filled buried waveguide structures.
  • a double-layer polymer film 80 containing a thin layer of core material 82 (e.g., 25 ⁇ m) on top of a thick layer 84 of sub-cladding material (e.g., 100 ⁇ m thick) can be easily fabricated in a conventional film casting process. These layers may also be thicker or thinner as is discussed in relation to the thickness of the layers in the core-first method.
  • a master 86 having designed features 88a or 88b therein is used to form a modified core layer 82a or 82b having openings 90a or 90b therein.
  • the openings 90a or 90b in modified core layer 82a or 82b penetrate through the core layer 82 and into the sub-cladding layer 84.
  • formation of the features in the core and cladding layers are accomplished by any suitable cutting technique (e.g., hot embossing, diamond cutting, laser ablation or reactive-ion etching (RIE), etc.).
  • RIE reactive-ion etching
  • a top cladding layer is formed by applying a top cladding material to the double-layer polymer film having modified core layer 82a or 82b with openings 90a or 90b formed therein.
  • the top cladding material is cured using any suitable method to yield a top cladding layer 92.
  • the top cladding material fills in the openings 90a or 90b so as to complete the formation of the buried waveguides 94a and 94b.
  • Buried waveguides 94a and 94b contain isolated core structures sandwiched between layers of, or surrounded by, or buried within the sub- and top cladding materials. Such waveguides can be used as basic components of integrated optical circuits in optoelectronic markets.
  • a triple layer polymer film i.e. a clad-core-clad multilayered film
  • a triple layer polymer film is used to form a waveguide according to the method detailed in Figure 8.
  • This fabrication approach is also applicable to not only the cyclic olefin monomer compositions discussed herein, but other polymer systems such as polyacrylates (such as deuterated polyfluoro-methacrylate), polyimides (such as cross-linked polyimides or fluorinated polyimides), or benzocyclobutene.
  • other polymers may be used. These polymers include, but are not limited to, heat- curable mass polymerizable materials, photo-curable polymers and solution-based polymer materials.
  • Figures 9A to 9D are other examples of waveguides formed using a multilayer cutting method and the above discussed core/clad formulations.
  • Figure 9A is an optical micrograph of a two-layer isolated channel waveguide formed using the multi-layer cutting method;
  • Figure 9C is a three-layer isolated-buried channel waveguide formed by taking the two or three layer structure formed by the cutting method and overcoating the structure with clad material; and

Abstract

The present invention relates to polymer compositions and methods of polymerizing such compositions. Furthermore, the present invention relates to polymer compositions that are useful in forming waveguides and to methods for making waveguides using such polymer compositions.

Description

Title: POLYMERIC COMPOSITIONS FOR FORMING OPTICAL
WAVEGUIDES; OPTICAL WAVEGUIDES FORMED THEREFROM; AND METHODS FOR MAKING SAME
RELATED APPLICATION DATA This application claims priority to previously filed U.S. Provisional
Application No. 60/221 ,420, filed on July 28, 2000, entitled "Polymeric Compositions for Forming Optical Waveguides; Optical Waveguides Formed Therefrom; and Methods for Making Same", and U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/252,251 , filed on November 21 , 2000 entitled "Polymeric Compositions for Forming Optical Waveguides; Optical Waveguides Formed Therefrom; and
Methods for Making Same", both of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION The invention herein described relates generally to polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides and methods for forming such optical waveguides using the same. In particular, the present invention relates to polymers made from at least one cyclic olefin monomer which can be used to form optical waveguides using either a clad-first or core first technique.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION The demand for continuous increase in transmission speed, data capacity and data density in integrated optical and optoelectronic circuits has been the motivating force behind numerous innovations in areas of broadband communications, high-capacity information storage, and large screen and portable information display. Although glass optical fibers are routinely used for high-speed data transfer over long distances, they are inconvenient for complex high-density circuitry because of their high density, poor durability and high cost of fabrication for complex photonic circuits. As such, polymeric materials hold great promise for constructing cost effective, reliable, passive and active integrated components capable of performing the required functions for integrated optics.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates generally to polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides and methods for forming such optical waveguides using the same. In particular, the present invention relates to polymers made from at least one cyclic olefin monomer which can be used to form optical waveguides using either a clad-first or core first technique.
In one embodiment, the present invention relates to polycyclic polymer compositions formed from one or more monomers or oligomers represented by the following structure:
Figure imgf000004_0001
wherein each X1" independently represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH2)n.- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5; "a" represents a single or double bond; R1 to R4 independently represent a hydrogen, a hydrocarbyl, or a functional substituent; and m is an integer from 0 to 5, with the proviso that when "a" is a double bond one of R1, R2 and one of R3, R4 are not present. In another embodiment, R1 to R4 independently comprises a hydrocarbyl, a halogenated hydrocarbyl or a perhalogenated hydrocarbyl group which are selected from: i) linear or branched CrC10 alkyl groups; ii) linear or branched C2-C10 alkenyl groups; iii) linear or branched C2-C10 alkynyl groups; iv) C4-C12 cycloalkyl groups; v) C4-C12 cycloalkenyl groups; vi) C6-C12 aryl groups; and vii) C7-C24 aralkyl groups, provided that at least one of R1 to R4 is a hydrocarbyl group.
In another embodiment, one or more of R1 to R4 represent a functional substituent independently selected from -(CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-0-Si(Me)3, -(CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-0-CH2-0-CH3, -(CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-0-C(O)-O-C(CH3)3, -(CH2)n-C(CF3)2-OH, -(CH2)nC(O)NH2, -(CH2)nC(O)CI, -(CH2)nC(O)OR5, -(CH2)n-OR5, -(CH2)n-OC(O)Rs, -(CH2)n-C(O)R5, -(CH2)n-OC(O)OR5, -(CH2)nSi(R5)3, -(CH2)nSi(OR5)3, -(CH2)n-O-Si(R5)3, and -(CH2)nC(O)OR6, wherein n independently represents an integer from 0 to 10, R5 independently represents a hydrogen, a linear or branched C^.CZ0 alkyl group, a linear or branched C,_C20 halogenated or perhalogenated alkyl group, a linear or branched C2-C10 alkenyl group, a linear or branched C2-C10 alkynyl group, a C5-C12 cycloalkyl group, a C6-C14 aryl group, a C6-C14 halogenated or perhalogenated aryl group and a C7- C24 aralkyl group; and R6 is selected from -C(CH3)3, -Si(CH3)3, -CH(R7)OCH2CH3, -CH(R7)OC(CH3)3 or one of the following cyclic groups:
Figure imgf000005_0001
or one of the following: -CH , and -C(CH3)2
wherein R7 represents a hydrogen or a linear or branched (C, - C5) alkyl group.
In still another embodiment, a polymer composition in accordance with the present invention is formed from one or more monomers or oligomers as described herein in combination with one or more crosslinking agents. Furthermore, in still another embodiment, the one or more crosslinking agents are latent crosslinking agents.
In one embodiment, the at least one crosslinking agent can be the compound shown below:
Figure imgf000006_0001
In yet another embodiment, the one or more crosslinking agents are represented by one or more of the following structures:
Figure imgf000006_0002
and
Figure imgf000006_0003
In yet another embodiment, the present invention relates to polycyclic polymer compositions formed from one or more monomers or oligomers represented by the following structure:
Figure imgf000007_0001
wherein each X1" independently represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH2)n- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5; Q represents an oxygen atom or the group N(R8); R8 is selected from hydrogen, a halogen, a linear or branched 0,-0,0 alkyl, and C6-C18 aryl; and m is an integer from 0 to 5.
In yet another embodiment, a polycyclic polymer composition formed from one or more monomers represented by the following structure:
Figure imgf000007_0002
wherein X"1 represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH2)n.- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5; RD is deuterium, "i" is an integer ranging from 0 to 6, with the proviso that when "i" is 0, at least one of R1D and R 2D must be present; R1 and R2 independently represent a hydrogen, a hydrocarbyl, or a functional substituent; and R1D and R2D, which are optional, independently represent a deuterium atom or a deuterium enriched hydrocarbyl group containing at least one deuterium atom.
In another embodiment, a polymer composition for use in a waveguide is produced from one or more monomers or oligomers described.
In still another embodiment, a polymer composition according to the present invention further includes at least one crosslinking agent. In one embodiment, the crosslinking agent is a latent crosslinking agent.
The present invention is advantageous in that it provides polymer compositions which permit the formation of optical waveguides having better performance qualities such as, for example, a difference (Δn) in the refractive index of the core material versus that of the clad material of at least about 0.00075 (i.e., at least about 0.05% where the clad or cladding material has a refractive index of about 1.5) for over a broad wavelength range (e.g., about 400 to about 1600 nm); lower intrinsic optical loss (lower than about 1 dB/cm and in some cases lower than about 0.5 dB/cm); a high glass transition temperature (Tg) (e.g., in one embodiment at least about 150 °C, in another embodiment at least about 250 °C, and in some cases at least about 280 °C).
Additionally, the present invention is advantageous in that it provides core and/or cladding compositions which can have a low viscosity or viscosities so as to be deliverable by any suitable technique, including ink jet printers, screen printers or stencil printers. Furthermore, the disclosed core-first method for forming optical waveguides is advantageous in that it permits the formation of optical waveguides with a reduction and/or elimination in the occurrence of "swelling" between layers (see Figures 5A and 5B for a photographic depiction of
"swelling"). Thus, the core-first method permits the formation of improved waveguides.
The foregoing and other features of the invention are hereinafter fully described and particularly pointed out in the claims, the following description and the annexed drawings setting forth in detail one or more illustrative embodiments of the invention, such being indicative, however, of but one or a few of the various ways in which the principles of the invention may be employed.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1 is a step diagram of the steps of a clad-first waveguide formation method;
Figures 2A to 2C depict waveguide structures formed using the clad-first method of Figure 1 ;
Figure 3 is a step diagram of the steps of a core-first waveguide formation method of the present invention;
Figures 4A to 4D are another set of waveguides formed using the core- first method of the present invention;
Figures 5A and 5B are photographs comparing the clad-first waveguide forming method of Figure 1 to the core-first waveguide forming method of Figure 3;
Figure 6 is a step diagram of the steps of a modified core-first waveguide formation method of the present invention;
Figures 7A and 7B are optical micrographs depicting a waveguide formed in accordance with the methods of Figures 3 and 6, respectively; Figure 8 is a step diagram of the steps of a method for forming isolate- buried channel waveguides by cutting multi-layer films; and
Figures 9A to 9D depict waveguide structure formed using the multilayer method of the present invention.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
As stated above, the present invention relates to a variety of methods which can be used to form optical waveguides, and more specifically to form optical waveguides having buried channels. Also, the present invention relates to compositions which can be used to form optical waveguides. It should be noted that in the following text and claims, range and ratio limits and/or range and time limits may be combined. Additionally, as used throughout the specification and claims the terms core composition and cladding (or clad) composition are defined to mean one of the following: (1) a composition which includes at least one monomer;
(2) a composition which includes at least one monomer and at least one oligomer, where the total amount of reactive monomer and/or reactive oligomer is at least about 30 weight percent based on the total weight of either the core or cladding composition; (3) a composition which includes at least one monomer and at least one polymer, where the total amount of reactive monomer is at least about 30 weight percent based on the total weight of either the core or cladding composition; and
(4) a composition which includes at least one monomer, at least one oligomer and at least one polymer, where the total amount of reactive monomer and/or reactive oligomer is at least about 30 weight percent based on the total weight of either the core or cladding composition. Oligomer as used throughout the specification and claims is defined to mean a composition containing less than about 1000 repeating units of a given monomer. Furthermore, the refractive indices referred to herein were measured using an Abbe refractometer at 589 nm and/or a Metricon Model 2010 prism coupler at 633 nm, 830 nm, and 1550 nm, following the guideline of ASTM Designation #D 542-95.
Generally, optical waveguides and even buried channel optical waveguides are composed of a core layer having a first index of refraction and a cladding layer having a second index of refraction, wherein the core layer is at least partially encompassed by the cladding layer. In another embodiment, the core layer is completely encompassed by the cladding layer (i.e., a buried channel structure or three-layer optical waveguide). It is the core which transmits light and the cladding layer which confines light. In the situation where the optical waveguide is a two layer structure, the core layer is partially bound by a layer of air.
In view of the above, formulations for each of the core and cladding (or clad) layers will be discussed below. However, in the general sense the methods disclosed below will work with any suitable polymer or polymers so long as the resulting core and cladding (or clad) layers formed therefrom meet the necessary performance criteria for the application in which the waveguide will be utilized. Numerous waveguide performance criteria exist, Table 1 summarizes the general minimum performance criteria which are applicable to all waveguides irrespective of the waveguide application. It should be noted though, that the present invention is not limited thereto. Rather, based on the polymer or polymers utilized, other performance criteria are obtainable.
Figure imgf000012_0001
In one embodiment, waveguides can be formed via the methods discussed below by using a variety of polymer compounds, such compounds include, but are not limited to, polyacrylates (such as deuterated polyfluoro- methacrylate), polyimides (such as cross-linked polyimides or fluorinated polyimides), benzocyclobutene or fluorinated benzocyclobutene.
In another embodiment, the waveguides of the present invention are formed from polymers formed from cyclic olefin monomers. In yet another embodiment, the cyclic olefin monomers used to form the waveguide polymers are norbornene-type monomers.
Formation of Cyclic Olefin Polymers:
In general, the polymerization of the cycloolefins used in one embodiment of the present invention are, in one embodiment, conducted using a Group 10 metal complex via addition polymerization to yield saturated, high glass transition temperature polymers. In another embodiment, the polymerization of the cycloolefins used in one embodiment of the present invention are conducted using a Group 10 metal complex and a weakly coordinating counteranion.
In yet another embodiment, the cycloolefins are polymerized by contacting a polymerizable polycycloolefin monomer charge with a high activity catalyst system comprising a Group 10 metal cation complex and a weakly coordinating counteranion complex of the formula:
[(R')zM(L')x(L")y]b [WCA]d
wherein M represents a Group 10 transition metal; R1 represents an anionic hydrocarbyl containing ligand; L' represents a Group 15 neutral electron donor ligand; L" represents a labile neutral electron donor ligand; z is 0 or 1 ; x is 1 or 2; y is 0, 1 , 2, or 3, and the sum of x, y, and z equals 4; and b and d are numbers representing the number of times the cation complex and weakly coordinating counteranion complex (WCA), respectively, are taken to balance the electronic charge on the overall catalyst complex. The monomer charge can be neat or in solution, and is contacted with a preformed catalyst of the foregoing formula. Alternatively, the catalyst can be formed in situ by admixing the catalyst forming components in the monomer charge.
Catalyst System The catalyst of the invention comprises a Group 10 metal cation complex and a weakly coordinating counteranion complex represented by Formula I below:
[(R,)zM(L')x(L")y]b [WCA]d I
wherein M represents a Group 10 transition metal; R' represents an anionic hydrocarbyl ligand; L' represents a Group 15 neutral electron donor ligand; L" represents a labile neutral electron donor ligand; x is 1 or 2; y is 0, 1 , 2, or 3, wherein the sum of x, y, and z is 4; and b and d are numbers representing the number of times the cation complex and weakly coordinating counteranion complex (WCA), respectively, are taken to balance the electronic charge of the overall catalyst complex. The weakly coordinating counteranion complex is an anion which is only weakly coordinated to the cation complex. It is sufficiently labile to be displaced by a neutral Lewis base, solvent or monomer. More specifically, the WCA anion functions as a stabilizing anion to the cation complex and does not transfer to the cation complex to form a neutral product. The WCA anion is relatively inert in that it is non-oxidative, non-reducing, and non-nucleophilic.
An anionic hydrocarbyl ligand is any hydrocarbyl ligand which when removed from the metal center M in its closed shell electron configuration, has a negative charge.
A neutral electron donor is any ligand which when removed from the metal center M in its closed shell electron configuration, has a neutral charge. A labile neutral electron donor ligand is any ligand which is not as strongly bound to metal center M, is easily displaced therefrom, and when removed from the metal center in its closed shell electron configuration has a neutral charge. In the cation complex above, M represents a Group 10 metal selected from nickel, palladium. In another embodiment, M represents platinum.
Representative anionic hydrocarbyl containing ligands defined under R' include hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C20 alkyl, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C2-C20 alkenyl, C6-C15 cycloalkenyl, allylic ligands or canonical forms thereof, C6-C30 aryl, C6-C30 heteroatom containing aryl, and C7-C30 aralkyl, each of the foregoing groups can be optionally substituted with hydrocarbyl and/or heteroatom substituents which, in one embodiment, are selected from linear or branched CrC5 alkyl, linear or branched C.-Cs haloalkyl, linear or branched C2-C5 alkenyl and haloalkenyl, halogen, sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, and phenyl optionally substituted with linear or branched CrC5 alkyl, linear or branched Cπ-Cg haloalkyl, and halogen, R1 also represents anionic hydrocarbyl containing ligands of the formula R"C(O)0, R"OC(O)CHC(O)R", R"C(0)S, R"C(S)O, R"C(S)S, R"O, R"2N, wherein R" is the same as R' defined immediately above.
The foregoing cycloalkyl, and cycloalkenyl ligands can be monocyclic or multicyclic. The aryl ligands can be a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or a fused ring system (e.g., naphthyl). In addition, any of the cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and aryl groups can be taken together to form a fused ring system. Each of the monocyclic, multicyclic and aryl ring systems described above optionally can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted with a substituent independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C C5 alkyl, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C C5 alkoxy, halogen selected from chlorine, fluorine, iodine and bromine, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, C6-C15 cycloalkenyl, and C6-C30 aryl. An example of a multicycloalkyl moiety is a norbomyl ligand. An example of a multicycloalkenyl moiety is a norbornenyl ligand. Examples of aryl ligand groups include phenyl and naphthyl. For purposes of illustration Structure I below represents a cationic complex wherein R' is a cycloalkenyl ligand derived from 1 ,5-cyclooctadiene. Structures II and III illustrate cationic complexes wherein R' represents multicycloalkyl and multicycloalkenyl ligands, respectively. In Structure III the norbornenyl ligand is substituted with an alkenyl group.
Figure imgf000016_0001
Structure I
Figure imgf000016_0002
Figure imgf000016_0003
Structure III
wherein M, L', L", x and y are as previously defined.
Additional examples of cationic complexes where R' represents a ring system is illustrated in Structures IV to IVc below.
Figure imgf000016_0004
Structure IV Structure IVa Structure IVb Structure IVc
wherein M, L', L", x and y are as previously defined. In another embodiment of the invention R' represents a hydrocarbyl ligand containing a terminal group that coordinates to the Group 10 metal. The terminal coordination group containing hydrocarbyl ligand are represented by the formula -Cd.H2dX->, wherein d' represents the number of carbon atoms in the hydrocarbyl backbone and is an integer from 3 to 10, and X-* represents an alkenyl or heteroatom containing moiety that coordinates to the Group 10 metal center. The ligand together with the Group 10 metal forms a metallacycle or heteroatom containing metallacycle. Any of the hydrogen atoms on the hydrocarbyl backbone in the formulae above can be independently replaced by a substituent selected from R1', R2', and R3' which are defined below.
A cation complex of the terminal coordination group containing hydrocarbyl metallacycle embodiment is represented by Structure V shown below:
Figure imgf000017_0001
Structure V wherein M, L', L", d', x and y are as previously defined, and X represents a radical selected from the group -CHR4'=CHR4', -OR4', -SR4', -N(R4')2
-N=NR4', -P(R4')2, -C(0)R4', -C(R4')=NR4', -C(O)OR4', -OC(O)OR4', -OC(O)R4', and R4' represents hydrogen, halogen, linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched O,-C5 haloalkyl, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C2-C5 alkenyl, linear or branched C2-C5 haloalkenyl, substituted and unsubstituted C6- C18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C7-C24 aralkyl.
The substituted terminal group containing hydrocarbyl metallacycles can be represented by structure Va, below.
Figure imgf000018_0001
wherein M, L', L", X, x and y are as previously defined, n represents an integer from 0 to 8 and R1', R2 , and R3' independently represent hydrogen, linear or branched CrC5 alkyl, linear or branched C.,-C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C2- C5 alkenyl, linear or branched C2-C5 haloalkenyl, substituted and unsubstituted C6-C30 aryl, substituted and unsubstituted C7-C30 aralkyl, and halogen. Any of R1', R2', and R3' can be taken together along with the carbon atoms to which they are attached can form a substituted or unsubstituted aliphatic C5-C20 monocyclic or polycyclic ring system, a substituted or unsubstituted C6-C10 aromatic ring system, a substituted and unsubstituted C10- C20 fused aromatic ring system, and combinations thereof. When substituted, the rings described above can contain monosubstitution or multisubstitution where the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched O,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl, linear or branched CrC5 alkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, fluorine, iodine and bromine. In Structure Va above it should be noted that when n is 0, X is bonded to the carbon atom that contains the R2' substituent.
Representative terminal group containing hydrocarbyl metallacycle cation complexes wherein the substituents are taken together to represent aromatic and aliphatic ring systems are illustrated below under Structures Vb and Vc.
Figure imgf000019_0001
Structure Vb Structure Vc
Additional examples of terminal group containing hydrocarbyl metallacycle cation complexes wherein any of R1' to R3' can be taken together to form aromatic ring systems are set forth in Structures Vd to Vg below.
Figure imgf000019_0002
Structure Vd Structure Ve Structure Vf Structure Vg
Illustrative examples of cation complexes containing polycyclic aliphatic ring systems are set forth under structures Vh, Vi, and Vj below:
Figure imgf000019_0003
Structure Vh Structure Vi Structure Vj In Structures V through Vj above, n1 is an integer from 0 to 5; and X, M, L1, L", n, x, y, R1' and R4', are as previously defined, and "a" represents a single or double bond, R5' and R6' independently represent hydrogen, and linear or branched CrC10 alkyl, R5' and R6' together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached can form a saturated and unsaturated cyclic group containing 5 to 15 carbon atoms.
Examples of heteroatom containing aryl ligands under R' are pyridinyl and quinolinyl ligands.
The allyl ligand in the cationic complex can be represented by the following structure:
Figure imgf000020_0001
Stracture VI
wherein R20', R21', and R22' each independently represent hydrogen, halogen, linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C,-Cg alkenyl, C6-C30 aryl, C7-C30 aralkyl, each optionally substituted with a substituent selected from linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl, halogen, and phenyl which can optionally be substituted with linear or branched Oj-Cg alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl, and halogen. Any two of R20', R21', and R22' can be linked together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached to form a cyclic or multicyclic ring, each optionally substituted with linear or branched 0,-Cg alkyl, linear or branched C C5 haloalkyl, and halogen. Examples of allylic ligands suitable in the cationic complexes of the invention include but are not limited to allyl, 2-chloroallyl, crotyl, 1 ,1-dimethyl allyl, 2-methylallyl, 1- phenylallyl, 2-phenylallyl, and β-pinenyl.
Representative cationic complexes containing an allylic ligand are shown below.
Figure imgf000021_0001
Structure Via Structure VIb
In Structures VI, Via, and VIb M, L', L", x and y are as previously defined.
Additional examples of allyl ligands are found in R. G. Guy and B. L. Shaw, Advances in Inorganic Chemistry and Radiochemistry, Vol. 4, Academic Press Inc., New York, 1962; J. Birmingham, E. de Boer, M. L. H. Green, R.B. King, R. Kόster, P.L.I. Nagy, G.N. Schrauzer, Advances in Organometallic Chemistry, Vol. 2, Academic Press Inc., New York, 1964; W. T. Dent, R. Long and A. J. Wilkinson, J. Chem. Soc, (1964) 1585; and H.C. Volger, Rec. Trav. Chim. Pay Bas, 88 (1969) 225; which are all hereby incorporated by reference.
Representative neutral electron donor ligands under U include amines, pyridines organophosphorus containing compounds and arsines and stibines, of the formula:
E(R7')3
wherein E is arsenic or antimony, and R7' is independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched CrC10 alkyl, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C,-C10 alkoxy, allyl, linear or branched C2-C10 alkenyl, C6-C12 aryl, C6-C12 aryloxy, C6-C12arylsufides (e.g., PhS), C7-C18 aralkyl, cyclic ethers and thioethers, tri(linear or branched CrC10 alkyl)silyl, tri(C6-C12 aryl)silyl, tri(linear or branched CrC10 aIkoxy)silyl, triaryloxysilyl, tri(linear or branched CrC10 alkyl)siloxy, and tri(C6-C12 aryl)siloxy, each of the foregoing substituents can be optionally substituted with linear or branched CrC5 alkyl, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl, C,-C5 alkoxy, halogen, and combinations thereof. Representative alkyl groups include but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, and dodecyl. Representative cycloalkyl groups include but are not limited to cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl. Representative alkoxy groups include but are not limited to methoxy, ethoxy, and isopropoxy. Representative cyclic ether and cyclic thioether groups include but are not limited furyl and thienyl, respectively. Representative aryl groups include but are not limited to phenyl, o-tolyl, and naphthyl. Representative aralkyl groups include but are not limited to benzyl, and phenylethyl (i.e., -CH2CH2PH). Representative silyl groups include but are not limited to triphenylsilyl, trimethylsilyl, and triethylsilyl. As in the general definition above each of the foregoing groups can be optionally substituted with linear or branched C1-C5 alkyl, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl, and halogen. Representative pyridines include lutidine (including 2,3-; 2,4-; 2,5-; 2,6-; 3,4-; and 3,5-substituted), picoline (including 2-,3-, or 4-substituted), 2,6-di-f- butylpyridine, and 2,4-di-f-butylpyridine.
Representative arsines include triphenylarsine, triethylarsine, and triethoxysilylarsine.
Representative stibines include triphenylstibine and trithiophenylstibine. Suitable amine ligands can be selected from amines of the formula N(R8')3, wherein R8' independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched O,-C20 alkyl, linear or branched CrC20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C3-C20 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C7-C18 aralkyl. When substituted, the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C1-C12 alkyl, linear or branched O,-C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched O,-C5 alkoxy, C6-C12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. Representative amines include but are not limited to ethylamine, triethylamine, diisopropylamine, tributylamine, N,N-dimethylaniline, N,N-dimethyl-4-f-butyIaniline, N,N-dimethyl-4- f-octylaniline, and N,N-dimethyl-4-hexadecylaniline.
The organophosphorus containing ligands include phosphines, phosphites, phosphonites, phosphinites and phosphorus containing compounds of the formula:
P(Rr)g[X,(R7')h]3-g
wherein X' is oxygen, nitrogen, or silicon, R7' is as defined above and each R7' substituent is independent of the other, g is 0, 1 , 2, or 3, and h is 1 , 2, or 3, with the proviso that when X' is a silicon atom, h is 3, when X1 is an oxygen atom h is 1 , and when X' is a nitrogen atom, h is 2. When g is 0 and X' is oxygen, any two or 3 of R7' can be taken together with the oxygen atoms to which they are attached to form a cyclic moiety. When g is 3 any two of R7' can be taken together with the phosphorus atom to which they are attached to represent a phosphacycle of the formula:
Figure imgf000023_0001
wherein R7' is as previously defined and h' is an integer from 4 to 11. The organophosphorus compounds can also include bidentate phosphine ligands of the formulae:
Figure imgf000023_0002
wherein R7 is as previously defined and i is 0, 1 , 2, or 3 are also contemplated herein.
Representative phosphine ligands include, but are not limited to trimeth lphosphine, triethylphosphine, tri-n-propylphosphine, triisopropylphosphine, tri-n-butylphosphine, tri-sec-butylphosphine, tri-/-butylphosphine, tri-f-butylphosphine, tricyclopentylphosphine, triallylphosphine, tricyclohexylphosphine, triphenylphosphine, trinaphthylphosphine, tri-p-tolylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, tri-m-tolylphosphine, tribenzylphosphine, tri(p-trifluoromethylphenyl)phosphine, tris(trifluoromethyl)phosphine, tri(p-fluorophenyl)phosphine, tri(p- trifluoromethylphenyl)phosphine, allyldiphenylphosphine, benzyldiphenylphosphine, bis(2-furyl)phosphine, bis(4- methoxyphenyl)phenylphosphine, bis(4-methylphenyl)phosphine, bis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)phosphine, £-butylbis(trimethylsilyl)phosphine, t- butyldiphenylphosphine, cyclohexyldiphenylphosphine, diallylphenylphosphine, dibenzylphosphine, dibutylphenylphosphine, dibutylphosphine, di-f-butylphosphine, dicyclohexylphosphine, diethylphenylphosphine, di-/- butylphosphine, dimethylphenylphosphine, dimethyl(trimethylsilyl)phosphine, diphenylphosphine, diphenylpropylphosphine, diphenyl(p-tolyl)phosphine, diphenyl(trimethylsilyl)phosphine, diphenylvinylphosphine, divinylphenylphosphine, ethyldiphenylphosphine, (2-methoxyphenyl)methylphenylphosphine, tri-n-octylphosphine, tris(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)phosphine, tris(3-chlorophenyl)phosphine, tris(4-chlorophenyl)phosphine, tris(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)phosphine, tris(3- fluorophenyl)phosphine, tris(2-furyl)phosphine, tris(2-methoxyphenyl)phosphine, tris(3-methoxyphenyl)phosphine, tris(4-methoxyphenyl)phosphine, tris(3-methoxypropyl)phosphine, tris(2-thienyl)phosphine, tris(2,4,6-trimethylphenyl)phosphine, tris(trimethylsilyl)phosphine, isopropyldiphenylphosphine, dicyclohexylphenylphosphine, (+)-neomenthyldiphenylphosphine, tribenzylphosphine, diphenyl(2-methoxyphenyl)phosphine, diphenyl(pentafluorophenyl)phosphine, bis(pentafluorophenyl)phenylphosphine, and tris(pentafluorophenyl)phosphine. Exemplary bidentate phosphine ligands include but are not limited to(R)- (+)-2,2'-Bis(diphenylphosphino)-1 ,1'-binaphthyl; bis(dicyclohexylphosphino)methane; bis(dicyclohexylphosphino)ethane; bis(diphenylphosphino)methane; bis(diphenylphosphino)ethane.
The phosphine ligands can also be selected from phosphine compounds that are water soluble thereby imparting the resulting catalysts with solubility in aqueous media. Selected phosphines of this type include but are not limited to carboxylic substituted phosphines such as 4-(diphenylphosphine)benzoic acid, and 2-(diphenylphosphine)benzoic acid, sodium
2-(dicycIohexylphosphino)ethanesulfonate,
4,4'-(phenylphosphinidene)bis(benzene sulfonic acid) dipotassium salt, 3, 3', 3"- phosphinidynetris(benzene sulfonic acid) trisodium salt,
4-(dicyclohexylphosphino)-1 , 1 -dimethylpiperidinium chloride,
4-(dicyclohexylphosphino)-1 ,1-dimethylpiperidinium iodide, quaternary amine- functionalized salts of phosphines such as 2-(dicyclohexylphosphino)-N,N,N- trimethylethanaminium chloride, 2,2'-(cyclohexylphosphinidene)bis[N,N,N-trimethylethanaminium dichloride,
2,2'-(cyclohexylphosphinidene)bis(N,N,N-trimethylethanaminium) diiodide, and
2-(dicycIohexylphosphino)-N,N,N-trimethyIethanaminium iodide. Examples of phosphite ligands include but are not limited to trimethylphosphite, diethylphenylphosphite, triethylphosphite, tris(2,4-di- -butylphenyl)phosphite, tri-n-propylphosphite, triisopropylphosphite, tri- n-butylphosphite, tri-sec-butylphosphite, triisobutylphosphite, tri-f-butylphosphite, dicyclohexylphosphite, tricyclohexylphosphite, triphenylphosphite, tri-p-tolylphosphite, tris(p-trifluoromethylphenyl)phosphite, benzyldiethylphosphite, and tribenzylphosphite. Examples of phosphinite ligands include but are not limited to methyl diphenylphosphinite, ethyl diphenylphosphinite, isopropyl diphenylphosphinite, and phenyl diphenylphosphinite.
Examples of phosphonite ligands include but are not limited to diphenyl phenylphosphonite, dimethyl phenylphosphonite, diethyl methylphosphonite, diisopropyl phenylphosphonite, and diethyl phenylphosphonite.
Representative labile neutral electron donor ligands (L") are reaction diluent, reaction monomers, DMF, DMSO, dienes including C4 to C10 aliphatic and C4 to C10 cycloaliphatic dienes representative dienes include butadiene, 1 ,6-hexadiene, and cyclooctadiene (COD), water, chlorinated alkanes, alcohols, ethers, ketones, nitriles, arenes, phosphine oxides, organic carbonates and esters.
Representative chlorinated alkanes include but are not limited to dichloromethane, 1 ,2-dichloroethane, and carbon tetrachloride. Suitable alcohol ligands can be selected from alcohols of the formula
R9'OH, wherein R9' represents linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl, linear or branched CrC20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C3-C20 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aralkyl. When substituted, the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C12 alkyl, linear or branched C C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched 0,-Cg alkoxy, C6-C12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. Representative alcohols include but are not limited to methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, butanol, hexanol, f-butanol, neopentanol, phenol, 2,6-di-/-propylphenol, 4-f-octylphenol, 5-norbornene-2- methanol, and dodecanol.
Suitable ether ligands and thioether ligands can be selected from ethers and thioethers of the formulae (R10-O-R10') and (R10'-S-R10'), respectively, wherein R10' independently represents linear or branched CrC10 alkyl radicals, linear or branched CrC20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C3-C20 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C1-C20 alkoxy substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aralkyl. When substituted, the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched 0,-0,2 alkyl, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 alkoxy, C6-C12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine, taken together along with the oxygen or sulfur atom to which they are attached to form a cyclic ether or cyclic thioether. Representative ethers include but are not limited to dimethyl ether, dibutyl ether, methyl-f-butyl ether, di-/-propyl ether, diethyl ether, dioctyl ether, 1 ,4-dimethoxyethane, THF, 1 ,4-dioxane and tetrahydrothiophene.
Suitable ketone ligands are represented by ketones of the formula R11'C(O)R11' wherein R11' independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched C1-C20 alkyl, linear or branched CrC2o haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C3-C20 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aralkyl. When substituted, the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C C12 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched O,-C5 alkoxy, C6-C12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. Representative ketones include but are not limited to acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, and benzophenone.
The nitrile ligands can be represented by the formula R12'CN, wherein R12' represents hydrogen, linear or branched CrC20 alkyl, linear or branched C1-C20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C3-C20 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aralkyl.
When substituted, the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched CrC12 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched CrC5 alkoxy, C6-C12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. Representative nitriles include but are not limited to acetonitrile, propionitrile, benzonitrile, benzyl cyanide, and 5-norbornene-2- carbonitrile.
The arene ligands can be selected from substituted and unsubstituted C6-C12 arenes containing monosubstitution or multisubstitution, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched CrC12 alkyl, linear or branched Ci-Cg haloalkyl, linear or branched O,-Cg alkoxy, C6-C12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. Representative arenes include but are not limited to toluene, benzene, o-, m-, and p-xylenes, mesitylene, fluorobenzene, o-difluorobenzene, p-difluorobenzene, chlorobenzene, pentafluorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, and hexafluorobenzene.
Suitable trialkyl and triaryl phosphine oxide ligands can be represented by phosphine oxides of the formula P(O)(R13')3, wherein R13' independently represents linear or branched C,-C2o alkyl, linear or branched C1-C20 haloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted C3-C20 cycloalkyl, linear or branched CrC20 alkoxy, linear or branched C C20 haloalkoxy, substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C6-C18 aralkyl. When substituted, the cycloalkyl, aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched 0,-0,2 alkyl, linear or branched C|-Cg haloalkyl, linear or branched
C C5 alkoxy, C6-C12 aryl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. Representative phosphine oxides include but are not limited to triphenylphosphine oxide, tributylphosphine oxide, trioctylphosphine oxide, tributylphosphate, and tris(2-ethylhexyl)phosphate. Representative carbonates include but are not limited to ethylene carbonate and propylene carbonate.
Representative esters include but are not limited to ethyl acetate and /-amyl acetate. WCA Description
The weakly coordinating counteranion complex, [WCA], of Formula I can be selected from borates and aluminates, boratobenzene anions, carborane and halocarborane anions. The borate and aluminate weakly coordinating counteranions are represented by Formulae II and III below:
[M'(R24')(R25')(R26')(R27')] ~ II
[M,(OR28')(OR29')(OR30')(OR31')] ~ III
wherein in Formula II M' is boron or aluminum and R24', R25', R26', and R27' independently represent fluorine, linear or branched CrC10 alkyl, linear or branched C C10 alkoxy, linear or branched C3-C5 haloalkenyl, linear or branched C3-C12 trialkylsiloxy, C18-C36 triarylsiloxy, substituted and unsubstituted C6-C30 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C6-C30 aryloxy groups wherein R24' to R27' can not all simultaneously represent alkoxy or aryloxy groups. When substituted the aryl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from linear or branched CrC5 alkyl, linear or branched C C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C C5 alkoxy, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkoxy, linear or branched CrC12 trialkylsilyl, C6-C18 triarylsilyl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. In another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine.
Representative borate anions under Formula II include but are not limited to tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(4-fluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3,5-difluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3,4,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)borate, methyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, ethyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, phenyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(1 ,2,2-trifluoroethylenyl)borate, tetrakis(4-tri-/-propylsilyltetrafluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(4-dimethyl-ferf- butylsilyltetrafluorophenyl)borate, (triphenylsiloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, (octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, tetrakis[3,5-bis[1-methoxy-2,2,2-trifluoro-1- (trifluoromethyl)ethyl]phenyl]borate, tetrakis[3- 1-methoxy-2,2,2-trifluoro-1-
(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, and tetrakis[3-[2,2,2- trifluoro-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)-1-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate.
Representative aluminate anions under Formula II include but are not limited to tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, tris(perfIuorobiphenyl)fIuoroaluminate, (octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)aluminate, and methyltris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate.
In Formula III M' is boron or aluminum, R28', R29', R30', and R31' independently represent linear or branched CrC10 alkyl, linear or branched CrC10 haloalkyl, C2-C10 haloalkenyl, substituted and unsubstituted C6-C30 aryl, and substituted and unsubstituted C7-C30 aralkyl groups, subject to the proviso that at least three of R28' to R31' must contain a halogen containing substituent. When substituted the aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from linear or branched CrC5 alkyl, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C C5 alkoxy, linear or branched CrC10 haloalkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. In another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine. The groups OR28' and OR29' can be taken together to form a chelating substituent represented by -0-R32'-O-, wherein the oxygen atoms are bonded to M' and R32' is a divalent radical selected from substituted and unsubstituted C6-C30 aryl and substituted and unsubstituted C7- C30 aralkyl. In one embodiment, the oxygen atoms are bonded, either directly or through an alkyl group, to the aromatic ring in the ortho or meta position. When substituted the aryl and aralkyl groups can be monosubstituted or multisubstituted, wherein the substituents are independently selected from linear or branched CrC5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C C5 alkoxy, linear or branched C,-C10 haloalkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine. In another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine. Representative structures of divalent R32' radicals are illustrated below:
Figure imgf000031_0001
wherein R33' independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched C C5 haloalkyl, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine (in another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine); R34' can be a monosubstituent or taken up to four times about each aromatic ring depending on the available valence on each ring carbon atom and independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched C1-C5 alkoxy, linear or branched CrC10 haloalkoxy, and halogen selected from chlorine, bromine, and fluorine (in one embodiment, the halogen is fluorine); and n" independently represents an integer from 0 to 6. It should be recognized that when n" is 0 the oxygen atom in the formula -O-R32'-O- is bonded directly to a carbon atom in the aromatic ring represented by R32'. In the above divalent structural formulae the oxygen atom(s), i.e., when n" is 0, and the methylene or substituted methylene group(s), -(C(R33')2)n»-> are, in one embodiment, located on the aromatic ring in the ortho or meta positions. Representative chelating groups of the formula -O-R32'-O- include but are not limited to are 2,3,4,5-tetrafluorobenzenediolate (-OC6F4O-), 2,3,4,5- tetrachlorobenzenediolate (-OC6CI4O-), and 2,3,4,5-tetrabromobenzenediolate (-OC6Br4O-), and bis(1 ,r-bitetrafluorophenyl-2,2'-diolate).
Representative borate and aluminate anions under Formula III include but are not limited to [B(OC(CF3)3)4]-, [B(OC(CF3)2(CH3))4]-, [B(OC(CF3)2H)4]-, [B(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4]-, [Al(OC(CF3)2Ph)4]-, [B(OCH2(CF3)2)4]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2C6H4CH3)4]-, [AI(OC(CF3)3)4r, [Al(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2H)4]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-/-Pr)4]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-f-butyl)4]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-SiMe3)4,]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-Si-/-Pr3)4,]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2C6H2- 2,6-(CF3)2-4-Si-/-Pr3)4]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2C6H3-3,5-(CF3)2)4]-, [AI(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,4,6- (CF3)3)4]-, and [AI(OC(CF3)2C6F5)4]-.
The boratobenzene anions useful as the weakly coordinating counteranion can be represented by Formula IV below:
Figure imgf000032_0001
wherein R34' is selected from fluorine, fluorinated hydrocarbyl, perfluorocarbyl, and fluorinated and perfluorinated ethers. As used here and throughout the specification, the term halohydrocarbyl means that at least one hydrogen atom on the hydrocarbyl radical, e.g., alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, and aralkyl groups, is replaced with a halogen atom selected from chlorine, bromine, iodine, and fluorine (e.g., haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, halocycloalkyl, haloaryl, and haloaralkyl). The term fluorohydrocarbyl means that at least one hydrogen atom on the hydrocarbyl radical is replaced by fluorine. The degree of halogenation can range from at least one hydrogen atom being replaced by a halogen atom (e.g., a monofluoromethyl group) to full halogenation (perhalogenation) wherein all hydrogen atoms on the hydrocarbyl group have been replaced by a halogen atom (e.g., perhalocarbyl such as trifluoromethyl (perfluoromethyl)). The fluorinated hydrocarbyl and perfluorocarbyl radicals contain, in one embodiment, 1 to 24 carbon atoms. In another embodiment, the fluorinated hydrocarbyl and perfluorocarbyl radicals contain 1 to 12 carbon atoms. In yet another embodiment, fluorinated hydrocarbyl and perfluorocarbyl radicals contain 6 carbon atoms and can be linear or branched, cyclic, or aromatic. The fluorinated hydrocarbyl and perfluorocarbyl radicals include but are not limited to fluorinated and perfluorinated linear or branched CrC24 alkyl, fluorinated and perfluorinated C3-C24 cycloalkyl, fluorinated and perfluorinated C2-C24 alkenyl, fluorinated and perfluorinated C3-C24 cycloalkenyl, fluorinated and perfluorinated C6-C24 aryl, and fluorinated and perfluorinated C7-C24 aralkyl. The fluorinated and perfluorocarbyl ether substituents are represented by the formulae -(CH2)mOR36', or -(CF2)mOR36' respectively, wherein R36' is a fluorinated or perfluorocarbyl group as defined above, m is and integer of 0 to 5. It is to be noted that when m is 0 the oxygen atom in the ether moiety is directly bonded attached to the boron atom in the boratobenzene ring.
In one embodiment, R34' radicals include those that are electron withdrawing in nature such as, for example, fluorinated and perfluorinated hydrocarbyl radicals selected from trifluoromethyl, perfluoroethyl, perfluoropropyl, perfluoroisopropyl, pentafluorophenyl and bis(3,5-trifluoromethyl)phenyl.
R35' independently represents hydrogen, halogen, perfluorocarbyl, and silylperfluorocarbyl radicals, wherein the perfluorocarbyl and silylperfluorocarbyl are as defined previously. In one embodiment, the halogen groups are selected from chlorine, fluorine. In another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine. When R35' is halogen, perfluorocarbyl, and/or silylperfluorocarbyl, the radical(s) are, in one embodiment, ortho or para to the boron atom in the boratobenzene ring. In another embodiment, when R35' is halogen, perfluorocarbyl, and/or silylperfluorocarbyl, the radical(s) are para to the boron atom in the boratobenzene ring. Representative boratobenzene anions include but are not limited to [1 ,4-dihydro-4-methyl-1-(pentafluorophenyl)]-2-borate, 4-(1 ,1-dimethyl)-1 ,2- dihydro-1 -(pentafluorophenyI)-2-borate, 1 -fluoro-1 ,2-dihydro-4- (pentafluorophenyl)-2-borate, and 1-[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1 ,2-dihydro- 4-(pentafluorophenyl)-2-borate.
The carborane and halocarborane anions useful as the weakly coordinating counteranion include but are not limited to CB11(CH3)12 ", CB^H^", 1-C2H5CBι.,rl .,.,", 1-Ph3SiCB11H11 ", 1-CF3CB 1H 1 , 12-BrCB^H^", 12-BrCB^H^", 7,12-Br2CB11H10 ", 12-CICB^H^", 7,12-C^CB^H^ , 1-H-CB^F^", 1-CH3-CB.,.,F.|.,",
Figure imgf000034_0001
6-CB9H9P, 6,8-CB9H8F2-, 6,7,8-CBgH7F3-, 6,7,8,9-CB9H6F4-, 2,6,7,8,9-CB9H5F5-, CBgHgBrg", 6,7,9,10,11
Figure imgf000034_0002
Figure imgf000034_0003
Figure imgf000034_0004
Co(Br3C2B9H8)2- and dodecahydro-1- carbadodecaborate.
Catalyst Preparation The catalysts of Formula I can be prepared as a preformed single component catalyst in solvent or can be prepared in situ by admixing the catalyst precursor components in the desired monomer to be polymerized.
The single component catalyst of Formula I can be prepared by admixing the catalyst precursors in an appropriate solvent, allowing the reaction to proceed under appropriate temperature conditions, and isolating the catalyst product. In another embodiment, a Group 10 metal pro-catalyst is admixed with a Group 15 electron donor compound and/or a labile neutral electron donor compound, and a salt of a weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to yield the preformed catalyst complex set forth under Formula I above. In another embodiment a Group 10 metal pro-catalyst containing a Group 15 electron donor ligand is admixed with a salt of a weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to yield the preformed catalyst complex. The catalyst preparation reactions are carried out in solvents that are inert under the reaction conditions. Examples of solvents suitable for the catalyst preparation reaction include but are not limited to alkane and cycloalkane solvents such as pentane, hexane, heptane, and cyclohexane; halogenated alkane solvents such as dichloromethane, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, ethylchloride, 1 ,1-dichloroethane, 1 ,2-dichloroethane, 1-chloropropane, 2- chloropropane, 1-chlorobutane, 2-chlorobutane, 1-chloro-2-methylpropane, and 1-chloropentane; ethers such as THF and diethylether; aromatic solvents such as benzene, xylene, toluene, mesitylene, chlorobenzene, and o-dichlorobenzene; and halocarbon solvents such as Freon® 112; and mixtures thereof. In one embodiment, solvents include, for example, benzene, fluorobenzene, o-difluorobenzene, p-difluorobenzene, pentafluorobenzene, hexafluorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, chlorobenzene, toluene, o-, m-, and p-xylenes, mesitylene, cyclohexane, THF, and dichloromethane. A suitable temperature range for carrying out the reaction is from about
-80°C to about 150°C. In another embodiment, the temperature range for carrying out the reaction is from about -30°C to about 100°C. In yet another embodiment, the temperature range for carrying out the reaction is from about 0°C to about 65°C. In still yet another embodiment, the temperature range for carrying out the reaction is from about 10°C to about 40°C. Pressure is not critical but may depend on the boiling point of the solvent employed, i.e. sufficient pressure to maintain the solvent in the liquid phase. Reaction times are not critical, and can range from several minutes to 48 hours. In one embodiment, the reactions are carried out under inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon. The reaction is carried out by dissolving the pro-catalyst in a suitable solvent and admixing the appropriate ligand(s) and the salt of the desired weakly coordinating anion with the dissolved pro-catalyst, and optionally heating the solution until the reaction is complete. The preformed single component catalyst can be isolated or can be used directly by adding aliquots of the preformed catalyst in solution to the polymerization medium. Isolation of the product can be accomplished by standard procedures, such as evaporating the solvent, washing the solid with an appropriate solvent, and then recrystallizing the desired product. The molar ratios of catalyst components employed in the preparation the preformed single component catalyst of the invention is based on the metal contained in the pro-catalyst component. In one embodiment, the molar ratio of pro-catalyst/Group 15 electron donor component/WCA salt is 1 :1-10:1-100, In another embodiment, the molar ratio of pro-catalyst/Group 15 electron donor component/WCA salt is 1 :1-5:1-20. In yet another embodiment, the molar ratio of pro-catalyst/Group 15 electron donor component/WCA salt is 1 : 1 -2: 1 -5. In embodiments of the invention where the pro-catalyst is ligated with a Group 15 electron donor ligand and/or a labile neutral electron donor ligand the molar ratio of pro-catalyst (based on the metal content) to WCA salt is 1 :1-100. In another embodiment, this ratio is 1 :1-20. In yet another embodiment, this ratio is 1 :1-5. In one embodiment, a Group 10 metal pro-catalyst dimer of the formula [R'MA']2 is admixed with a Group 15 electron donor compound, (L1), and a salt of a suitable weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to produce the single component catalyst product as shown in equation (1) below.
1. [R'MA']2 + xL' + yL" + [WCA] salt → [R'M(L')x(L")y]b [WCA]d
Suitable pro-catalyst dimers of the formula [R'MA']2 include but are not limited to the following compositions (allyl)palladiumtrifluoroacetate dimer, (allyl)palladiumchloride dimer, (crotyl)palladiumchloride dimer, (allyl)palladiumiodide dimer, (β-pinenyl)palladiumchloride dimer, methallylpalladium chloride dimer, 1,1-dimethylallylpalladium chloride dimer, and
(allyl)palladiumacetate dimer.
In another embodiment, a ligated Group 10 metal pro-catalyst of the formula [R'M(L")yA'] is admixed with a Group 15 electron donor compound, (L'), and a salt of a suitable weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to produce the single component catalyst product as shown in equation (2) below. 2. [R'M(L")yA'] + xL' + [WCA] salt → [R'M(L')x(L")y]b [WCA]d
A representative pro-catalyst of the formula [R'M(L")yA'] includes but is not limited to (COD)palladium (methyl)chloride.
In a further embodiment, a Group 10 metal ligated pro-catalyst of the formula [R'M(L')xA'] containing the Group 15 electron donor ligand (L') is admixed with a salt of a suitable weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to produce the single component catalyst product as shown in equation (3) below.
3. [R'M(L')XA'] + yL" + [WCA] salt → [R'M(L')x(L")y]b [WCA]d
Suitable pro-catalysts of the formula [R'M(L')XA'] include but are not limited to the ollowing compositions: ally pal adium(tricyclohexylphosphine)chloride, ally! pal adium(tricyclohexylphosphine)triflate, ally] pal adium(triisopropylphosphine)triflate, ally pal adium(tricyclopentylphosphine)triflate, ally pal adium(tricycIohexylphosphine)trifluoroacetate (also referred to herein as Allyl Pd-PCy3TFA), ally pal adiumrtr o-tolylphosphine)chloride, ally pal adium(tri o-tolylphosphine)triflate, ally pal adiumrtri -o-tolylphosphine)nitrate, ally pal adium(tri -o-tolylphosphine)acetate, allyl pal adiumrtri isopropylphosphine)triflimide, ally pal adiumrtri cyclohexylphosphine)triflimide, ally pal adiumrtri phenylphosphine)triflimide, ally pal adiumrtri naphthylphosphine)triflate, ally pal adiumrtri cyclohexylphosphine) p-tolylsulfonate, allyl pal adiumrtri phenylphosphine)triflate, ally pal adiumrtri isopropylphosphine)trifluoroacetate, (allyl)platinum(tricyclohexylphosphine)chloride,
(allyl)platinum(tricyclohexylphosphine)triflate,
(1 ,1 -dimethylallyl)palladium(triisopropylphosphine)trifluoroacetate.
(2-chloroallyl)palladium(triisopropylphosphine)trifluoroacetate,
(crotyl)palladium(triisopropylphosphine)triflate,
(crotyl)palladium(tricyclohexylphosphine)triflate,
(crotyl)palladium(tricyclopentylphosphine)triflate,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclohexylphosphine)triflate,
(methallyl)palladium(triisopropylphosphine)triflate,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclopentylphosphine)triflate,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclohexylphosphine)chloride,
(methallyl)palladium(triisopropylphosphine)chloride,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclopentylphosphine)chloride,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclohexylphosphine)triflimide,
(methallyl)palladium(triisopropylphosphine)triflimide,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclopentylphosphine)triflimide,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclohexylphosphine)trifluoroacetate,
(methallyl)palladium(triisopropylphosphine)trifluoroacetate,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclopentylphosphine)trifluoroacetate,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclohexylphosphine)acetate,
(methallyl)palladium(triisopropylphosphine)acetate,
(methallyl)palladium(tricyclopentylphosphine)acetate,
(methallyl)nickel(tricyclohexylphosphine)triflate,
{2-[(dimethylamino)methyl]phenyl-C,N-}-palladium(tricyclohexyl- phosphine)chloride,
[(dimethylamino)methyl]phenyl-C,N-}-palladium(tricyclohexyl-phosphine)triflate,
(hydrido)palladium bis(tricyclohexylphosphine)triflate,
(hydrido)palladium bis(tricyclohexylphosphine)formate
(hydrido)palladium bis(tricyclohexylphosphine)chloride,
(hydrido)palladium bis(triisopropylphosphine)chloride, (hydrido)palladium bis(tricyclohexylphosphine)nitrate, (hydrido)palladium bis(tricyclohexylphosphine)trifluoroacetate, and (hydrido)palladiumbis(triisopropylphosphine)triflate.
Other pro-catalyst components suitable for use in the foregoing process include (Me2NCH2C6H4)Pd(03SCF3)P(cyclohexyl)3 (i.e., ortho-metallatedphenylmethlyenedimethylamino palladium tricyclohexylphosphine), (allyl)Pd(P-/-Pr3)C6F5, (allyl)Pd(PCy3)C6F5, (CH3)Pd(PMe3)2CI, (C2H5)Pd(PMe3)2CI (Ph)Pd(PMe3)2CI, (CH3)Pd(PMe3)2Br, (CH3)Pd(PMe2Ph)2CI, (C2H5)Pd(PMe3)2Br, (C2H5)Pd(PMe3)2Br, (Ph)Pd(PMe3)2Br, (CH3)Pd(PMe3)NO3, (CH3)Pd(P(/-Pr)3)2O3SCCF3, (η1-benzyl)Pd(PEt3)2CI,
(allyl)Pd(PMe3)OC(O)CH2CH=CH2, (allyl)Pd(AsPh3)CI, (aIlyl)Pd(PPh3)CI, (allyl)Pd(SbPh3)CI, (methylallyl)Pd(PPh3)CI, (methylallyl)Pd(AsPh3)CI, (methylallyl)Pd(SbPh3)CI, (methylallyl)Pd(PBu3)CI, and (methylallyl)Pd(P[(OCH2)3]CH)CI. In another embodiment, the catalyst can be formed by protonating a pro- catalyst of the formula:
Figure imgf000039_0001
in the presence of a Brønsted acid based WCA salt or an equivalent reaction utilizing a carbonium or silylium based WCA salt to yield an active catalyst as illustrated in Eq. 4.
' \ H-WCA I > (protonation) 4. (Cd ,H2d.) M(L')x(L")y ^ [H-(Cd ,H2 - M (L')X(L") [WCA]
In this embodiment R' is a divalent hydrocarbyl ligand of the formula -(CdH2d)- that is taken together with the Group 10 metal center M to form a metallacycle where d' represents the number of carbon atoms in the divalent hydrocarbyl backbone and is an integer from 3 to 10. Any of the hydrogen atoms on the divalent hydrocarbyl backbone can be replaced by linear or branched C,- C5 alkyl, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, and C6-C10 aryl. The cycloalkyl and aryl moieties can optionally be substituted with a halogen substituent selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, and iodine. In another embodiment, the halogen is fluorine. In addition, any two or three of the alkyl substituents taken together with the hydrocarbyl backbone carbon atoms to which they are attached can form an aliphatic or aromatic ring system. The rings can be monocyclic, polycyclic, or fused. Protonation occurs at one of the hydrocarbyl/metal center bond interfaces to yield a cation complex with a monovalent hydrocarbyl ligand coordinated to the metal center M.
In another embodiment a Group 10 metal ligated pro-catalyst of the formula [R,M(L')x(L")yA'] containing a Group 15 electron donor ligand ( ) and a labile neutral electron donor ligand (L") is admixed with a salt of a suitable weakly coordinating anion in an appropriate solvent to produce the single component catalyst product as shown in equation (5) below.
5. [R'M(L')x(L")yA'] + [WCA] salt -* [R'M(L')x(L")y]b [WCA]d
Suitable pro-catalysts of the formula [R,M(L')x(L")yA'] include but are not limited to the following compositions:
[(allyl)Pd(NCCH3)(P-/-Pr3)][B(O2-3,4,5,6-CI4C6)2], [(allyl)Pd(HOCH3)(P-/-Pr3)][B(O2- 3,4,5,6-CI4C6)2], [(allyl)Pd(HOCH3)(P-/-Pr3)][B(O2-3,4,5,6-Br4C6)2], [(allyl)Pd(HOCH3)(P-/-Pr3)][B(O2C6H4)2], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(P-/-Pr3)][BPh4], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(P-/-Pr3)], [SbF6][(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(P-/-Pr3)] [BF4],
[(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(PCy3)] [BF4], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(PPh3)] [BF4], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(P-/-Pr3)] [PF6], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(PCy3)] [PF6], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(PPh3)] [PF6], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(P-/-Pr3)] [CIO4], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(PCy3)] [CIO4], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(PPh3)] [CIO4], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(P-/-Pr3)] [SbF6], [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(PCy3)] [SbF6], and [(allyl)Pd(OEt2)(PPh3)] [SbF6].
In another embodiment of the invention the catalyst of Formula I is generated by reacting a pro-catalyst of the formula [M(L')x(L")y(A')2] with an organometallic compound of aluminum, lithium or magnesium, and a source of a weakly coordinating anion (WCA) or a strong Lewis Acid. In this embodiment the anionic hydrocarbyl ligand (R') on the group 10 metal center (M) is supplied via reaction with the organometallic compound to yield the active catalyst as shown below.
6. [M(L')x(L")y(A,)2] + [WCA] salt or Strong Lewis Acid + organometallic compound -* [R'M(L,)x(L")y]b [WCA]d
Examples of pro-catalysts suitable for use in this embodiment include : nickel acetylacetonate, nickel carboxylates, nickel(ll) chloride, nickel(ll) bromide, nickel ethylhexanoate, nickel(ll) trifluoroacetate, nickel(ll) hexafluoroacetylacetonate,
NiCI2(PPh3)2,
NiBr2(P(p-tolyl)3)2, trans-PdCI2(PPh3)2, palladium(ll) bis(trifluoroacetate), palladium(ll) acetylacetonate,
(cyclooctadiene)palladium(ll) dichloride,
Pd(acetate)2(PPh3)2, PdCI2(PPh3)2 PdBr2(PPh3)2
PdBr2(P(p-tolyl)3)2,
PdCI2(P(o-tolyl)3)2,
PdCI2(P(cyclohexyl)3)2, palladium(ll) bromide, palladium(ll) chloride, palladium(ll) iodide, palladium(ll) ethylhexanoate, dichloro bis(acetonitrile)palladium(ll), dibromo bis(benzonitrile)palladium(ll), platinum(ll) chloride, platinum(ll) bromide, and platinum bis(triphenylphosphine)dichloride.
In general the Group 10 metal pro-catalyst is a nickel(ll), platinum(ll) or palladium(ll) compound containing two anionic leaving groups (A'), which can be readily displaced by the weakly coordinating anion that is provided by the WCA salt or strong Lewis acid described below and can be replaced by hydrocarbyl groups originating from the organometallic compound. The leaving groups can be the same or different. The Group 10 metal pro-catalyst may or may not be ligated.
When the pro-catalyst of this embodiment is not ligated with a Group 15 electron donor component ( ), the Group 15 electron donor ligand can be added to the reaction medium as shown in the following reaction scheme.
7. [M(L")y(A')2] + xL' + [WCA] salt or Strong Lewis Acid + organometallic compound -* [R'M(L,)x(L")y]b [WCA]d
The strong Lewis acids suitable for use in this embodiment are selected from compounds of the formula: M'(R41')3
wherein M' represents aluminum or boron and R41' represents monosubstituted and multisubstituted C6-C30 aryl, wherein the substituents on the aryl group are independently selected from halogen (in one embodiment, the halogen is fluorine), linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl (in one embodiment, trifluoromethyl), and halogenated and perhalogenated phenyl (in one embodiment, pentafluorophenyl). Examples of such strong Lewis acids include: tris(pentafluorophenyl)boron, tris(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)boron, tris(2,2',2"- nonafluorobiphenyl)borane, and tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminum.
The organometallic compound is a hydrocarbyl derivative of silicon, germanium, tin, lithium, magnesium or aluminum. In one embodiment, aluminum derivatives are utilized. The organoaluminum component of the catalyst system is represented by the formula:
AIR A.
wherein R' independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched C,.C20 alkyl, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C2-C20 alkenyl, C6-C15 cycloalkenyl, allylic ligands or canonical forms thereof, C6-C20 aryl, and C7-C30 aralkyl, Q is a halide or pseudohalide selected from chlorine, fluorine, bromine, iodine, linear and unbranched C,-C20 alkoxy, C6-C24 aryloxy; x" is 0 to 2.5. In another embodiment, x" is 0 to 2. In yet another embodiment, x" is 0 to 1. In one embodiment, trialkylaluminum compounds are used. Examples of suitable organometallic compounds include: methyllithium, sec-butyllithium, n-butyllithium, phenyllithium, butylethylmagnesium, di-π-butylmagnesium, butyloctylmagnesium, trimethylaluminum, triethylaluminum, tri-π-propylaluminum, tri-/-propylaluminum, tri-/-butylaluminum, tri-2-methylbutylaluminum, tri-octylaluminum, diethylaluminum chloride, ethylaluminum dichloride, di-/-butylaluminum chloride, diethylaluminum bromide, ethylaluminum sesquichloride, diethylaluminum ethoxide, diethylaluminum(/-butylphenoxide), and diethylaluminum(2,4-di-tetf-butyIphenoxide).
Embodiments of the catalyst devoid of a hydrocarbyl containing ligand can be synthesized by reacting a pro-catalyst of the formula [M(A')2] with the desired ligands and WCA salt in accordance with the following reaction scheme:
8. [M(A')2] + xL' + 2[WCA] salt → [M(L')X] [WCA]2 + 2A' salt wherein x = 1 or 2, M, and L' are as previously defined.
Examples of pro-catalyst compounds include palladium(ll) bis(acetylacetonate, palladium (acetate)2, Pd(NO3)2, PdCI2, PdBr2, and Pdl2. The foregoing schematic equations (1 to 8) have been presented for illustrative purposes only. While they have been written in balanced form, it should be recognized that an excess of reaction components can be employed without deviating from the spirit of invention. For example, an excess of L', L", A', or WCA salt containing components can be employed in the process of the invention so long as the process is not deleteriously affected.
In a one embodiment the molar ratio of the Group 10 metal/Group 15 electron donor compound/source of a weakly coordinating anion/organometallic compound is 1 :1-10:1-100:2-200. In another embodiment, the molar ratio of the
Group 10 metal/Group 15 electron donor compound/source of a weakly coordinating anion/organometallic compound is 1 :1-5:1-40:4-100. In yet another embodiment, the molar ratio of the Group 10 metal/Group 15 electron donor compound/source of a weakly coordinating anion/organometallic compound is 1 :1-2:2-20:5-50. In embodiments where the Group 10 metal ion source is an adduct containing a Group 15 electron donor compound, no additional Group 15 electron donor compound need be employed. In this embodiment the molar ratio of the Group 10 metal/Group 15 electron donor compound/source of a weakly coordinating anion/organometallic compound is 1 :0:2-20:5-50. In all of the forgoing embodiments the catalysts of Formula I can be prepared as a preformed single component catalyst in solvent or they can be prepared in situ by admixing the precursor components (ligated or non-ligated Group 10 metal component with leaving group(s), ligand component(s), and WCA source or strong Lewis acid source) in the desired monomer, monomer mixtures, or solutions thereof. It is also possible to admix two or even three of the catalyst precursor components and then add the mixture to the monomer or monomer solution containing the remaining catalyst precursor component(s). In the equations and formulae set forth above and throughout the specification, R', M, L', L", [WCA], b, d, x, and y are as defined above unless otherwise defined, A' is an anionic leaving group which is defined below, [WCA] salt is a metal salt of the weakly coordinating anion [WCA], and the abbreviations Me, Et, Pr, Bu, Cy, and Ph, as used here and throughout the specification refer to methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, cyclohexyl, and phenyl, respectively.
The foregoing Group 10 metal pro-catalyst components are commercially available or can be synthesized by techniques well known in the art.
As discussed above catalyst complex of Formula I can be formed in situ by combining any of the Group 10 metal pro-catalysts with the desired catalyst system components in monomer. In cases where the Group 10 metal pro- catalyst already contains the desired ligand groups, the pro-catalyst is mixed in monomer along with the WCA salt or the alternative activators such as strong Lewis acids or Brønsted acids. The WCA salt, strong Lewis acid or Brønsted acid serves as the an activator for the pro-catalyst in the presence of monomer. The in situ reactions for preparing the catalysts of Formula I generally follow the same conditions and reaction schemes as outlined for the preparation of the preformed single component catalysts, the principal difference being that the catalysts are formed in monomer in lieu of solvent and that a polymer product is formed. Leaving Groups
A' represents an anionic leaving group that can be readily displaced by the weakly coordinating anion that is provided by the WCA salt. The leaving group forms a salt with the cation on the WCA salt. Leaving group A' is selected from halogen (i.e., Br, CI, I, and F), nitrate, triflate (trifluoromethanesulfonate), triflimide
(bistrifluoromethanesulfonimide), trifluoroacetate, tosylate, AIBr4 ", AIF4 ", AICI4 ~, AIF3O3SCF3-, AsCI6 ", SbClg", SbF6 ", PF6 ", BF4-,CIO4-, HSO4 ", carboxylates, acetates, acetylacetonates, carbonates, aluminates, and borates.
In another embodiment the leaving group can be a hydrocarbyl group or halogenated hydrocarbyl group when a Brønsted acid based WCA salt is utilized as the activator. In this embodiment the activator protonates the hydrocarbyl or halogenated hydrocarbyl forming a neutral moiety. The leaving group moiety is, in one embodiment, selected from the hydride, linear or branched C,-Cg alkyl, linear or branched CrC5 haloalkyl, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, and C6-C10 aryl. The cycloalkyl and aryl moieties can optionally be substituted with a halogen substituent selected from bromine, chlorine, fluorine, and iodine. In one embodiment, the halogen is fluorine. In this embodiment, A' is protonated to yield the neutral moiety A'H. Methyl and pentafluorophenyl groups are representative examples of leaving groups under this embodiment. Halogen leaving groups include chlorine, iodine, bromine and fluorine.
The acetates include groups of the formula R38'C(O)O", and the carbonates include groups of the formula R38'OC(O)O", wherein R38' represents linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl (in one embodiment, the haloalkyl contains only fluorine), linear or branched 0,-Cg alkenyl, C6-C12 aryl, optionally monosubstituted or independently multisubstituted with linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl, and halogen (in one embodiment, fluorine).
The aluminate and borate leaving groups can be represented by the formulae M'(R39')4 ~, M'(GR39')4 ~, M'(-C=CPh)4 ~, or a moiety represented by the following structures:
Figure imgf000047_0001
wherein G is a sulfur or oxygen atom Ph represents phenyl and substituted phenyl as defined below, and R39' independently represents linear or branched C.,-C.,0 alkyl, linear or branched CrC10 chloro- or bromoalkyl, C5-C10 cycloalkyl, substituted and unsubstituted aryl (in one embodiment, phenyl and substituted phenyl), substituted and unsubstituted C7-C20 aralkyl (in one embodiment, phenylalkyl and substituted phenylalkyl). By substituted is meant that the aryl or phenyl groups can contain one or more of linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched C,-C5 haloalkyl, chlorine, and bromine substituents, and combinations thereof. Representative aluminate groups include but are not limited to tetraphenoxyaluminate, tetrakis(cycIohexanolato)aluminate, tetraethoxyaluminate, tetramethoxyaluminate, tetrakis(isopropoxy)aluminate, tetrakis(2-butanolato)aluminate, tetrapentyloxyaluminate, tetrakis(2-methyl-2- propanolato)aluminate, tetrakis(nonyloxy)aluminate, and bis(2-methoxyethanolate-O,O')bis(2-methoxyethanolate-O')aluminate, tetrakis(phenyl)aluminate, tetrakis(p-tolyl)aluminate, tetrakis(m-tolyl)aluminate, tetrakis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)aluminate, and tetrakis(3,5-dimethylphenyl)aluminate.
Representative borate groups include tetraphenylborate, tetrakis(4-methylphenyl)borate, tetrakis(4-chlorophenyl)borate, tetrakis(4-bromophenyl)borate, tetrakis(2-bromo-4-chlorophenyl)borate, butyltriphenylborate, tetrakis(4-methoxyphenyl)borate, tetrakis(phenylethynyl)borate, bis(1 ,2-benzenediolato)borate, triphenyl(phenylethynyl)borate, bis(tetrafluorobenzenediolate)borate, bis(tetrachlorobenzenediolate)borate, bis(tetrabromobenzenedio!ate)borate, bis(1 ,1'-biphenyl-2,2'-diolato)borate, tetrakis(thiophenolyl)borate, bis(3,5-di-tetf- butylbenzenediolate)borate, tetrakis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)borate, tetrakis(p- to!yl)borate, tetrakis(3,5-dimethylphenyl)borate, and tetrakis(m-tolyl)borate.
In addition to the anionic leaving groups described above, A' can also be selected from highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkylsulfonyl and arylsulfonyl containing anions of the formulae (R40'SO2)2CH-, (R40'SO2)3C", and (R40'SO2)2N-, wherein R40' independently represents linear or branched C,-C20 highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkyl, C5-C15 highly fluorinated and perfluorinated cycloalkyl, and highly fluorinated and perfluorinated C6-C22 aryl. Optionally, the alkyl and cycloalkyl groups can contain a heteroatom in the chain of cyclic structure, respectively. In one embodiment, the heteroatoms include divalent (non-peroxidic) oxygen (i.e., -O-), trivalent nitrogen, and hexavalent sulfur. Any two of R40' can be taken together to form a ring. When R40' is a cycloalkyl substituent, a heterocycloalkyl substituent, or is taken with another R40' group to form a ring, the ring structures, in one embodiment, contain 5 or 6 atoms, 1 or 2 of which can be heteroatoms.
In the above formulae the term highly fluorinated means that at least 50 percent of the hydrogen atoms bonded to the carbon atoms in the alkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl moieties are replaced by fluorine atoms. In one embodiment, at least 2 out of every 3 hydrogen atoms on the alkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl moieties under R40' are replaced by fluorine. In another embodiment, at least 3 out of every 4 hydrogen atoms are replaced by fluorine. In yet another embodiment, all of the hydrogen atoms on the R40' substituent are replaced by fluorine to give the perfluorinated moiety. In addition to or in lieu of fluorine atom substitution on the aryl ring(s), the aryl groups can contain linear or branched C,-
C10 highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkyl groups, such as, for example, trifluoromethyl. In embodiments where hydrogen atoms remain on the alkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl moieties, a portion or all of the remaining hydrogen atoms can be replaced with bromine and/or chlorine atoms. Representative highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkylsulfonyl and arylsulfonyl containing anions of the foregoing formulae include but are not limited to (C2F5SO2)2N-, (C4F9SO2)2N", (CF3S02)2N-, (CF3SO2)(C4F9SO2)N-, ((CF3)2NC2F4SO2)2N-, (C6F5SO2)(CF3SO2)N-, (CF3SO2)(CHF2SO2)N-, (C2F5SO2)(CF3SO2)N-, (C3F7SO2)2N", ((CF3)2(F)CSO2)2N", (C4F8(CF3)2NS02)2N"' (C8F17SO2)3C-, (CF3SO2)3C-, (CF3SO2)2CH", (C4F9SO2)3C", (CF3SO2)2(C4F9SO2)C-, ((CF3)2NC2F4SO2)C(SO2CF3)2-, (3,5-bis(CF3)C6H3)SO2N(SO2CF3)-, (C6F5SO2)C(SO2CF3)2 ", and the structures exemplified below:
Figure imgf000049_0001
Additional highly fluorinated and perfluorinated alkylsulfonyl and arylsulfonyl anions suitable as leaving groups are described in Turowsky and Seppelt, Inorganic Chemistry, 1988, 27, 2135-2137, and in U.S. Patent Numbers 4,387,222; 4,505,997; 5,021,308; 5,072,040; 5,162,177; and 5,273,840 the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
WCA SALTS The salt of the weakly coordinating anion employed in the process of the present invention can be represented by the formula [C(L")z]b[WCA]d, wherein C represents a proton (H+), an alkaline earth metal cation, a transition metal cation or an organic group containing cation, L" and WCA, are as defined above, z is an integer from 0 to 8, and b and d represent the number of times the cation complex and weakly coordinating counteranion complex (WCA), respectively, are taken to balance the electronic charge on the overall salt complex. The alkali metal cations include Group 1 metals selected from lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, and cesium. In one embodiment, the Group 1 metal cations are lithium, sodium and potassium.
The alkali earth metal cations include Group 2 metals selected from beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, and barium. In one embodiment, the
Group 2 metal cations are magnesium, calcium, strontium, and barium. The transition metal cation is selected from zinc, silver, and thallium.
The organic group cation is selected from ammonium, phosphonium, carbonium and silylium cations, i.e., [NHR41' 3]+, [NR41' 4]+, [PHR41 3], [PR41' 4], [R41' 3C]+, and [R41' 3Si]+, where R41' independently represents a hydrocarbyl, silylhydrocarbyl, or perfluorocarbyl group, each containing 1 to 24 carbon atoms, (or in another embodiment, from 1 to 12 carbons) arranged in a linear, branched, or ring structure. By perfluorocarbyl is meant that all carbon bonded hydrogen atoms are replaced by a fluorine atom. Representative hydrocarbyl groups include but are not limited to linear or branched C,-C20 alkyl, C3-C20 cycloalkyl, linear or branched C2 to C20 alkenyl, C3-C20 cycloalkenyl, C6-C24 aryl, and C7-C24 aralkyl, and organometallic cations. The organic cations are selected from trityl, trimethylsilylium, triethylsilylium, tris(trimethylsilyl)silylium, tribenzylsilylium, triphenylsilylium, tricyclohexylsilylium, dimethyloctadecylsilylium, and triphenylcarbenium (i.e., trityl). In addition to the above cation complexes ferrocenium cations such as [(C5H5)2Fe]+ and [(C5(CH3))2Fe]+ are also useful as the cation in the WCA salts of the invention.
Examples of WCA salts having a weakly coordinating anion described under Formula II include but are not limited to lithium tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, silver tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(2-fluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, silver tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, ferrocenium tetrakis(3-fluorophenyl)borate, ferrocenium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(4-fluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(4-fluorophenyl)borate, silver tetrakis(4-fluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(4-fluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(3,5-difluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(3,5-difluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(3,5-difluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(3,5-difluorophenyl)borate,
2,6-dimethylanilinium tetrakis(3,5-difluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, lithium(diethyl ether) tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, lithium(diethyl ether)25 tetrakis(pentafluorophenyI)borate (also referred to herein as LiFABA), lithium tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(3,4,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(1 ,2,2-trifluoroethylenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)borate, lithium methyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, lithium phenyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, lithium tris(isopropanol) tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(methanol) tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, silver tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, tris(toluene)silver tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, tris(xylene)silver tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(4-triisopropylsilyltetrafluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(4-dimethyI-tetf-butylsilyltetrafluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyI)phenyl]borate,
2,6-dimethylanilinium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate,
N,N-dimethylanilinium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, N,N-dimethylanilinium tetrakis[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate lithium (triphenylsiloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, sodium (triphenyIsiloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(3,4,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(1 ,2,2-trifluoroethyIenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)borate, sodium methyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, sodium phenyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(2, 3,4, 5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(3,4,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(1 ,2,2-trifluoroethylenyl)borate, thallium tetrakis(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)borate, sodium methyItris(perfluorophenyl)borate, thallium phenyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(3,4,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(1 ,2,2-trifluoroethylenyI)borate, trityl tetrakis(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)borate, trityl methyltris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, trityl phenyltris(perfluorophenyl)borate, silver tetrakis[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, silver(toluene) tetrakis[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, thallium tetrakis[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, lithium (hexyltris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, lithium triphenylsiloxytris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, lithium(octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, sodium(octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, sodium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, potassium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, trityl tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, potassium(octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, potassium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, magnesium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, magnesium magnesium(octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, magnesium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, calcium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, calcium (octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, calcium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis[3,5-bis[1 -methoxy-2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -
(trifIuoromethyl)ethyI]phenyl]borate, sodium tetrakis[3,5-bis[1-methoxy-2, 2, 2-trifluoro-1- (trifluoromethyl)ethyl]phenyl]borate, silver tetrakis[3,5-bis[1-methoxy-2,2,2-trifluoro-1-
(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]phenyl]borate, thallium tetrakis[3,5-bis[1-methoxy-2, 2, 2-trifluoro-1-
(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]phenyl]borate, lithium tetrakis[3-[1 -methoxy-2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-5-
(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, sodium tetrakis[3-[1-methoxy-2, 2, 2-trifluoro-1-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-5-
(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, silver tetrakis[3-[1 -methoxy-2,2,2-trifluoro-1 -(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-5- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, thallium tetrakis[3-[1-methoxy-2, 2, 2-trifluoro-1-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-5-
(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, lithium tetrakis[3-[2,2,2-trifluoro-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)-1-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-
5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, sodium tetrakis[3-[2, 2, 2-trifluoro-1 -(2,2, 2-trifluoroethoxy)-1-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-
5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, silver tetrakis[3-[2,2,2-trifluoro-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)-1-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-5-
(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, thallium tetrakis[3-[2,2,2-trifluoro-1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy)-1-(trifluoromethyl)ethyl]-
5-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]borate, methylsilylium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, methylsilylium etherate tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, ethylsilylium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, phenylsilylium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyI)borate, s(mesityl)silylium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, benzylsilylium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, methylsilylium methyltris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, ethylsilylium methyltris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, phenylsilylium methyItris(pentafluorophenyl)borate, benzylsilylium methyltris (pentafluorophenyl)borate, methylsilylium tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, ethylsilylium tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, phenylsilylium tetrakis(2, 3,4, 5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, benzylsilylium tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, methylsilylium tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, phenylsilylium tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, methylsilylium tetrakis(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)borate, benzylsilylium tetrakis(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)aluminate, phenylsilylium methyltris(3,4,5-trifluorophenyl)aluminate, ethylsilylium tetrakis(1 ,2,2-trifluoroethenyl)borate, tricyclohexylsilylium tetrakis(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, dimethyloctadecylsilylium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, tris(trimethyl)silyl)silylium methyltri(2,3,4,5-tetrafluorophenyl)borate, 2,2'-dimethyl-
1 , 1 '-binaphthylmethylsilylium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)borate, 2,2'-dimethyl-1 , 1 '-binaphthylmethylsilylium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)borate, lithium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, trityl tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, trityl (perfluorobiphenyl)fluoroaluminate, lithium(octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, lithium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)aluminate, sodium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, trityl tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, sodium(octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, sodium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)aluminate, potassium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, trityl tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, potassium (octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, potassium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)aluminate, magnesium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, magnesium(octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, magnesium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyI)phenyl)aluminate, calcium tetrakis(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, calcium (octyloxy)tris(pentafluorophenyl)aluminate, and calcium tetrakis(3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)aluminate.
Examples of WCA salts having a weakly coordinating anion described under
Formula III include but are not limited to LiB(OC(CF3)3)4, LiB(OC(CF3)2(CH3))4,
LiB(OC(CF3)2H)4, LiB(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4, TIB(OC(CF3)3)4, TIB(OC(CF3)2H)4,
TIB(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4, TIB(OC(CF3)2(CH3))4, (Ph3C)B(OC(CF3)3)4, (Ph3C)B(OC(CF3)2(CH3))4, (Ph3C)B(OC(CF3)2H)4, (Ph3C)B(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4, AgB(OC(CF3)3)4, AgB(OC(CF3)2H)4, AgB(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4, LiB(02C6F4)2, TIB(02C6F4)21 Ag(toluene)2B(O2C6F4)2, and Ph3CB(O2C6F4)2, LiB(OCH2(CF3)2)4 [Li(HOCH3)4]B(02C6CI4)2, [Li(HOCH3)4]B(O2C6F4)2, [Ag(toluene)2]B(02C6CI4)2, LiB(02C6CI4)2, (LiAI(OC(CF3)2Ph)4), (TIAI(OC(CF3)2Ph)4), (AgAI(OC(CF3)2Ph)4), (Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2Ph)4, (LiAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4CH3)4), (ThAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4CH3)4),
(AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4CH3)4), (Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4CH3)4), LiAI(OC(CF3)3)4, ThAI(OC(CF3)3)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)3)4, Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)3)4, LiAl(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4l Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)(CH3)H)4, LiAI(OC(CF3)2H)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)2H)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2H)4, Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2H)4, LiAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-/-Pr)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-/-Pr)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-/-Pr)4,
Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4^^Pr)4^iAI(OC(CF3)2CeH4^t utyl)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)2CeH4-4-f- butyl)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-f-butyl)4, Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-f-butyl)4, LiAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-SiMe3)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-Si Me3)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4- Si Me3)4, Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-Si Me3)4, LiAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-Si-/-Pr3)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-Si-/-Pr3)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-Si-/-Pr3)4,
Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6H4-4-Si-/-Pr3)4, LiAl(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,6-(CF3)2-4-Si-/-Pr3)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,6-(CF3)2-4-Si-/-Pr3)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,6-(CF3)2-4-Si-/-Pr3)4, Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,6-(CF3)2-4-Si-/-Pr3)4, LiAI(OC(CF3)2CeH3-3,5-(CF3)2)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)2C6H3-3,5-(CF3)2)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6H3-3,5-(CF3)2)4, Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6H3-3,5-(CF3)2)4, LiAI(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,4,6-(CF3)3)4,
TIAI(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,4,6-(CF3)3)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,4,6-(CF3)3)4, Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6H2-2,4,6-(CF3)3)4, LiAI(OC(CF3)2C6F5)4, TIAI(OC(CF3)2CeFg)4, AgAI(OC(CF3)2C6F5)4, and Ph3CAI(OC(CF3)2C6F5)4.
Examples of boratobenzene salts include but are not limited to [1 ,4-dihydro-4- methyl-1-(pentafluorophenyl)]-2-borinyl lithium, [1 ,4-dihydro-4-methyl-1-
(pentafluorophenyl)]-2-borinyl triphenylmethylium, 4-(1 ,1-dimethyl)-1 ,2-dihydro-1- (pentafluorophenyl)-2-borinyl lithium, 4-(1 ,1-dimethyl)-1 ,2-dihydro-1- (pentafluorophenyl)-2-borinyl triphenylmethylium, 1-fluoro-1 ,2-dihydro-4- (pentafluorophenyl)-2-borinyl lithium, 1-fluoro-1 ,2-dihydro-4-(pentafluorophenyl)-2- borinyl triphenylmethylium, 1-[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1 ,2-dihydro-4- (pentafluorophenyl)-2-borinyl lithium, and 1-[3,5-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-1,2- dihydro-4-(pentafluorophenyl)-2-borinyl triphenylmethylium.
Examples of WCA carborane and halocarborane salts include but are not limited to silver dodecahydro-1-carbadodecaborate, LiCB11(CH3)12, LiCB^H^,
(Me3NH)[CB11H12]I (Me4N)[1-C2H5CB11H11]I (Me4N)[1-Ph3SiCB11H11]l
Figure imgf000057_0001
P 2-BrCB„ „], Cs[7 ,12-Br2CB„Hn],
Figure imgf000057_0002
Figure imgf000057_0003
Li[6-CB9H9F], Li[6,8-CB9H8F2], Li[6,7,8-CB9H7F3],
Li[6,7,8,9-CB9H6F4], Li[2,6,7,8,9-CB9HgF5], Li[CB9HgBr5], AgfCB^HeC , AgtCBiAW. TIICBnHeU.
Figure imgf000057_0005
Figure imgf000057_0004
Li[2,6,7,8,9,10-CB9H5F5], Li[1-H-CB9F9],
Figure imgf000057_0006
Figure imgf000057_0007
and Na[Co(Br3C2B9H8)2]. Additional halocarborane salts are disclosed in International Patent Publication WO 98/43983, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Monomers The catalysts of the present invention are suitable for the preparation of a wide range of polymers comprising cyclic repeating units. The cyclic polymers are prepared by the addition polymerization of a polycycloolefin monomer(s) in the presence of a catalytic amount of a catalyst of Formula I or the pro-catalyst components described above. The monomer(s) can be polymerized via solution or mass polymerization techniques. As stated herein the terms "polycycloolefin,"
"polycyclic," and "norbornene-type" monomer are used interchangeably and mean that the monomer contains at least one norbornene moiety as shown below:
Figure imgf000058_0001
where X"' represents oxygen, nitrogen with hydrogen or a C, to C10 alkyl linear or branched being bonded thereto, sulfur or a methylene group of the formula -(CH2)n.- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5.
The simplest polycyclic monomer of the invention is the bicyclic monomer, bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, commonly referred to as norbornene. The term norbornene-type monomer is meant to include norbornene, substituted norbomene(s), and any substituted and unsubstituted higher cyclic derivatives thereof so long as the monomer contains at least one norbornene-type or substituted norbornene-type moiety. In one embodiment, the substituted norbornene-type monomers and higher cyclic derivatives thereof contain a pendant hydrocarbyl substituent(s) or a pendant functional substituent(s) containing an oxygen atom. In one embodiment, the norbornene-type or polycycloolefin monomers are represented by the structure below:
Figure imgf000058_0002
wherein each X'" is independently defined as above, "a" represents a single or double bond, R1 to R4 independently represent a hydrogen, hydrocarbyl or functional substituent, m is an integer from 0 to 5, and when "a" is a double bond one of R\ R2 and one of R3, R4 are not present.
When the substituent is a hydrocarbyl group, R1 to R4 can be a halohydrocarbyl, or perhalohydrocarbyl group, or even a perhalocarbyl group (e.g., a trifluormethyl group). In one embodiment, R1 to R4 independently represent hydrocarbyl, halogenated hydrocarbyl and perhalogenated hydrocarbyl groups selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C10 alkyl, linear or branched, C2-C10 alkenyl, linear or branched C2-C10 alkynyl, C4-C12 cycloalkyl, C4-C12 cycloalkenyl, C6- C12 aryl, and C7-C24 aralkyl, R1 and R2 or R3 and R4 can be taken together to represent a C,-C.,0 alkylidenyl group. Representative alkyl groups include but are not limited to methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, and decyl. Representative alkenyl groups include but are not limited to vinyl, allyl, butenyl, and cyclohexenyl. Representative alkynyl groups include but are not limited to ethynyl, 1 -propynyl, 2- propynyl, 1-butynyl, and 2-butynyl. Representative cycloalkyl groups include but are not limited to cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cyclooctyl substituents. Representative aryl groups include but are not limited to phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl. Representative aralkyl groups include but are not limited to benzyl, and phenethyl. Representative alkylidenyl groups include methylidenyl, and ethylidenyl, groups. In one embodiment, the perhalohydrocarbyl groups include perhalogenated phenyl and alkyl groups. The halogenated alkyl groups useful in the invention are partially or fully halogenated and are linear or branched, and have the formula CzX"2z+1 wherein X" is independently a halogen as set forth above or a hydrogen and z is selected from an integer of 1 to 20. In another embodiment, each X" is independently selected from hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine and/or bromine. In yet another embodiment, each X" is independently either a hydrogen or a fluorine.
In one embodiment, the perfluorinated substituents include perfluorophenyl, perfluoromethyl, perfluoroethyl, perfluoropropyl, perfluorobutyl, and perfluorohexyl. In addition to the halogen substituents, the cycloalkyl, aryl, and aralkyl groups of the invention can be further substituted with linear or branched CrC5 alkyl and haloalkyl groups, aryl groups and cycloalkyl groups.
When the pendant group(s) is a functional substituent, R1 to R4 independently represent a radical selected from (CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-0-Si(Me)3, -(CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-O-CH2-O-CH3, -(CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-O-C(O)-O-C(CH3)3, -(CH2)n-C(CF3)2-OH, -(CH2)nC(O)NH2, -(CH2)nC(O)CI, -(CH2)nC(0)OR5, -(CH2)n-OR5, - (CH2)n-OC(O)R5, -(CH2)n-C(O)R5, -(CH2)n-OC(O)OR5, -(CH2)nSi(R5)3, -(CH2)nSi(OR5)3, -(CH2)n-O-Si(R5)3, and -(CH2)nC(0)OR6 wherein n independently represents an integer from 0 to 10 and R5 independently represents hydrogen, linear or branched G|-C20 alkyl, linear or branched CrC20 halogenated or perhalogenated alkyl, linear or branched C2-C10 alkenyl, linear or branched C2-C10 alkynyl, C5-C12 cycloalkyl, C6-C14 aryl, C6-C14 halogenated or perhalogenated aryl, and C7-C24 aralkyl. Representative hydrocarbyl groups set forth under the definition of R5 are the same as those identified above under the definition of R1 to R4. As set forth above under R1 to R4 the hydrocarbyl groups defined under R5 can be halogenated and perhalogenated. For example, when R5 is CrC20 halogenated or perhalogenated alkyl, R5 can be represented by the formula C^X"^, wherein z and X" are defined as above, and at least one X" on the alkyl group must be a halogen (e.g., Br, CI, or F). It is to be recognized that when the alkyl group is perhalogenated, all X" substituents are halogenated. Examples of perhalogenated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, trifluoromethyl, trichloromethyl, -C7F15, and -C11F23. Examples of perhalogenated aryl groups include, but are not limited to, pentachlorophenyl and pentafluorophenyl. The R6 radical represents an acid labile moiety selected from -C(CH3)3, -Si(CH3)3, -CH(R7)OCH2CH3, -CH(R7)OC(CH3)3 or the following cyclic groups:
Figure imgf000060_0001
wherein R7 represents hydrogen or a linear or branched (C, - C5) alkyl group. The alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, /-propyl, butyl, /-butyl, f-butyl, pentyl, t- pentyl and neopentyl. In the above structures, the single bond line projecting from the cyclic groups indicates the position where the cyclic protecting group is bonded to the acid substituent. Examples of R6 radicals include 1-methyl-1-cyclohexyl, isobornyl, 2-methyl-2-isobornyl, 2-methyl-2-adamantyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranoyl, 3-oxocyclohexanonyl, mevalonic lactonyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, and 1-t- butoxy ethyl.
The R6 radical can also represent dicyclopropylmethyl (Dcpm), and dimethylcyclopropylmethyl (Dmcp) groups which are represented by the following structures:
In Structure VII above, R1 and R4 together with the two ring carbon atoms to which they are attached can represent a substituted or unsubstituted cycloaliphatic group containing 4 to 30 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group containing 6 to 18 ring carbon atoms or combinations thereof. The cycloaliphatic group can be monocyclic or polycyclic. When unsaturated the cyclic group can contain monounsaturation or multiunsaturation. In one embodiment, the unsaturated cyclic group is a monounsaturated cyclic group. When substituted, the rings contain monosubstitution or multisubstitution wherein the substituents are independently selected from hydrogen, linear or branched C,-C5 alkyl, linear or branched C C5 haloalkyl, linear or branched CrCg alkoxy, halogen, or combinations thereof. R1 and R4 can be taken together to form the divalent bridging group, -C(O)-Q-(0)C-, which when taken together with the two ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form a pentacyclic ring, wherein Q represents an oxygen atom or the group N(R8), and R8 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, linear or branched C,- C10 alkyl, and C6-C18 aryl. A representative structure is shown in below.
Figure imgf000062_0001
wherein each X'" is independently defined as above and m is an integer from 0 to 5. Deuterium enriched norbornene-type monomers wherein at least one of the hydrogen atoms on the norbornene-type moiety and/or one at least one of the hydrogen atoms on a pendant hydrocarbyl substituent described under R1 to R4 have been replaced by a deuterium atom are contemplated within the scope of the present invention. In one embodiment, at least 40 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the norbornene-type moiety and/or the hydrocarbyl substituent are replaced by deuterium. In another embodiment, at least about 50 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the norbornene-type moiety and/or the hydrocarbyl substituent are replaced by deuterium. In yet another embodiment, at least about 60 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the norbornene-type moiety and/or the hydrocarbyl substituent are replaced by deuterium. In one embodiment, the deuterated monomers are represented by the structure below:
Figure imgf000062_0002
wherein X"' is defined as above, RD is deuterium, "i" is an integer ranging from 0 to 6, with the proviso that when "i" is 0, at least one of R1D and R2D must be present, R1 and R2 independently represent a hydrocarbyl or functional substituent as defined above, and R1D and R2D may or may not be present and independently represent a deuterium atom or a deuterium enriched hydrocarbyl group containing at least one deuterium atom. In one embodiment, the deuterated hydrocarbyl group is selected from linear or branched C,-C10 alkyl wherein at least 40 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium. In another embodiment, the deuterated hydrocarbyl group is selected from linear or branched C C10 alkyl wherein at least 50 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium. In yet another embodiment, the deuterated hydrocarbyl group is selected from linear or branched C,-C10 alkyl wherein at least 60 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium.
Crosslinked polymers can be prepared by copolymerizing the norbornene- type monomer(s) set forth under Structure VII above with a multifunctional norbornene-type crosslinking monomer(s). By multifunctional norbornene-type crosslinking monomer is meant that the crosslinking monomer contains at least two norbornene-type moieties (norbornene-type double bonds), each functionality being polymerizable in the presence of the catalyst system of the present invention. The crosslinkable monomers include fused multicyclic ring systems and linked multicyclic ring systems. Examples of fused crosslinking agents are illustrated in structures below. For brevity, norbornadiene is included as a fused multicyclic crosslinking agent and is considered to contain two polymerizable norbornene-type double bonds.
Figure imgf000063_0001
G lrφU C M rW Q)
wherein Y represents a methylene (-CH2-) group and m independently represents an integer from 0 to 5, and when m is 0, Y represents a single bond. Representative monomers under the forgoing formulae are set forth below.
Figure imgf000064_0001
ύxXΪJ 0 K 3
Figure imgf000064_0002
A linked multicyclic crosslinking agent is illustrated generically in Structure VIII below.
Figure imgf000064_0003
wherein "a" independently represents a single or double bond, m independently is an integer from 0 to 5, R9 is a divalent radical selected from divalent hydrocarbyl radicals, divalent ether radicals and divalent silyl radicals, and n is equal to 0 or 1. By divalent is meant that a free valence at each terminal end of the radical is attached to a norbornene-type moiety. In one embodiment, the divalent hydrocarbyl radicals are alkylene radicals and divalent aromatic radicals. The alkylene radicals are represented by the formula -(CdH2d)- where d represents the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene chain and is an integer from 1 to 10. The alkylene radicals are, in one embodiment, selected from linear or branched (C,-C10) alkylene such as methylene, ethylene, propylene, butylene, pentylene, hexylene, heptylene, octylene, nonylene, and decylene. When branched alkylene radicals are contemplated, it is to be understood that a hydrogen atom in the alkylene backbone is replaced with a linear or branched (C1 to C5) alkyl group. The divalent aromatic radicals are selected from divalent phenyl, and divalent naphthyl radicals. The divalent ether radicals are represented by the group -R10-O-R10-, wherein R10 independently is the same as R9. Examples of specific linked multicyclic crosslinking agents are represented as in Structures Villa to VI He as follows.
Figure imgf000065_0001
Villa VIIIc Vlllb
In one embodiment, the crosslinking agent is selected from those shown below:
Figure imgf000065_0002
which is dimethyl bis[bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene-5-methoxy] silane (also referred to herein as dimethyl bis(norbornene methoxy) silane),
Figure imgf000065_0003
where n is 1 to 4,
Figure imgf000065_0004
Figure imgf000066_0001
Figure imgf000066_0002
Figure imgf000066_0003
Figure imgf000066_0004
Some other types of norbornene-based crosslinking agents include, but are ted to, those represented in formulae a-m below.
Figure imgf000067_0001
Figure imgf000067_0002
In another embodiment, fluorine-containing norbornene-based cross linkers are used. For example, in one embodiment one or more of the following fluorinated norbornene crosslinking agents can be utilized.
Figure imgf000068_0001
F - Crosslinking Agent I
and
Figure imgf000068_0002
F - Crosslinking Agent II.
Norbornadiene may be employed as a crosslinking agent in this invention. In another embodiment, higher homologs are utilized. Norbornadiene can be converted into higher homologs or Diels-Alder products using a variety of dimerization catalysts or heating it with cyclopentadiene. In the case of the crosslinking monomer norbornadiene dimer an alternative synthesis is employed in which norbornadiene is coupled catalytically to yield a mixture of isomers of norbornadiene dimer as shown below:
Dimerization Catalyst
Figure imgf000068_0003
Figure imgf000068_0004
The dimerization of norbornadiene is easily achieved by numerous catalysts to yield a mixed composition of up to six isomers, i.e., Wu et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,545,790). In one embodiment, the isomers are the exo-trans-exo, endo-trans-endo, and exo- trans-endo-1 ,4,4a,4b,5,8,8a,8b-ocfa 7y ro-1 ,4:5,8-dimethanobiphenylene ("norbornadiene dimer" or "[NBD]2"). In another embodiment, the exo-trans-exo norbornadiene dimer is utilized as a crosslinking agent. Heating norbornadiene dimer with dicyclopentadiene or cyclopentadiene can produce higher oligomers of norbornadiene dimer. Other crosslinking agents are prepared by the reaction of cyclopentadiene with olefins containing two or more reactive olefins, e.g., cyclooctadiene, 1 ,5-hexadiene, 1 ,7-octadiene, and tricycloheptatriene.
In one embodiment, the crosslinkable monomers are those containing two reactive norbornene type moieties (containing two polymerizable double bonds). In another embodiment, the monomer is 5,5'-(1 ,2-ethanediyl)bisbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2- ene (NBCH2CH2NB) prepared by the reaction of 5-(3-butenyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2- ene and cyclopentadiene via a Diels-Alder reaction. The higher homolog of 5-(3-butenyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene is also a co-monomer of choice, i.e., 2-(3-butenyl)-1 ,2,3,4,4a,5,8,8a-octahydro-1 ,4:5,8-dimethanonaphthalene. Similarly,
1 , 4, 4a, 5, 6, 6a, 7, 10, 10a, 11, 12, 12a-dodecahydro-1 , 4:7, 10- dimethanodibenzo[a, e]cyclooctene is prepared in the Diels Alder reaction between 1, 4, 4a, 5, 6, 9, 10, 10a-octahydro-1, 4-methanobenzocyclooctene and cyclopentadiene. The higher homolog of between 1, 4, 4a, 5, 6, 9, 10, 10a-octahydro-1 , 4-methanobenzocyclooctene is also a comonomer of choice, i.e. ,
1 ,4,4a,5,5a,6,7,10,11 ,11a,12,12a-dodecahydro-
1 ,4:5, 12-dimethanocycloocta[b]naphthalene. The symmetric and asymmetric trimers of cyclopentadiene are also useful crosslinking reagents, i.e., 4, 4a, 4b, 5, 8, 8a, 9, 9a-octahydro-1,4:5,8-dimethano-1H-fluorene and 3a,4, 4a, 5, 8, 8a, 9, 9a-octahydro-4,9:5,8-dimethano-1H-benz[f]indene, respectively. In yet another embodiment, the monomer is obtained from the reaction of cyclopentadiene and norbornadiene, i.e., 1 ,4,4a,5,8,8a-hexahydro-1 ,4:5,8-dimethanonaphthalene. Divinylbenzene and excess cyclopentadiene forms the symmetric crosslinking agent 5,5'-(1,4-phenylene)bisbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene. An economical route for the preparation of hydrocarbyl substituted and functionally substituted norbornene monomers relies on the Diels-Alder addition reaction in which CPD or substituted CPD is reacted with a suitable dienophile at elevated temperatures to form the substituted norbornene-type adduct generally shown by the following reaction scheme:
Figure imgf000070_0001
wherein R1 to R4 independently represent hydrogen, hydrocarbyl, and/or a functional group as previously described.
Other norbornene type adducts can be prepared by the thermal pyrolysis of dicyclopentadiene (DCPD) in the presence of a suitable dienophile. The reaction proceeds by the initial pyrolysis of DCPD to CPD followed by the Diels-Alder addition of CPD and the dienophile to give the adducts shown below:
Figure imgf000070_0002
wherein n represents the number of cyclic units in the monomer and R1 to R4 independently represent hydrogen, hydrocarbyl, and/or a functional group as previously defined. Norbornadiene and higher Diels-Alder adducts thereof similarly can be prepared by the thermal reaction of CPD and DCPD in the presence of an acetylenic reactant as shown below.
R1 + R1C≡CR2
Figure imgf000070_0004
wherein n, R1 and R2 are as defined above. Deuterium enriched norbornene-type monomers can be prepared by heating DCPD in the presence of D2O and a base such as NaOH to yield deuterated CPD which in turn can be reacted with a dienophile (Eq. 1) or a deuterated dienophile (Eq. 2) to give the respective deuterated norbornene containing a pendant deuterated hydrocarbyl substituent or a pendant hydrocarbyl substituent. In another embodiment non-deuterated CPD can be reacted with a deuterium enriched dienophile to yield norbornene containing a deuterium enriched hydrocarbyl pendant group (Eq. 3).
Figure imgf000071_0001
Figure imgf000071_0002
In Eq. 1 and Eq. 2 above, R1 to R4, R1D and R2D are as previously defined, and i' is an integer ranging from 1 to 6.
Examples of polymerizable norbornene-type monomers include but are not limited to norbornene (bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene), 5-ethylidenenorbornene, dicyclopentadiene, tricyclo[5.2.1.02'6]deca-8-ene, 5-methoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, 5-methylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene-5-carboxylic acid,
5-methylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene,
5-ethylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-ethoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, 5-n-propoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene,
5-/-propoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-n-butoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-(2-methylpropoxy)carbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-(1 -methylpropoxy)carbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, 5-f-butoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-cyclohexyloxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-(4'-f-butyIcyclohexyloxy)carbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-phenoxycarbonylbicycIo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene,
5-tetrahydrofuranyIoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, 5-tetrahydropyranyloxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene-5-carboxylic acid,
5-acetyloxybicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-methoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-ethoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, 5-methyI-5-n-propoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-/-propoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-π-butoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-(2-methylpropoxy)carbonyIbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-(1 -methylpropoxy)carbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, 5-methyI-5-f-butoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-cyclohexyloxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-(4'-f-butylcyclohexyloxy)carbonylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-phenoxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene,
5-methyl-5-tetrahydrofuranyloxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, 5-methyl-5-tetrahydropyranyloxycarbonylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, -methyl-5-acetyloxybicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, -methyl-5-cyanobicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(methoxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(ethoxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(n-propoxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(/-propoxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(n-butoxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(f-butoxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(phenoxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(tetrahydrofuranyloxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, ,6-di(tetrahydropyranyloxycarbonyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, and ,6-dicarboxyanhydridebicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, -methoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17,10]dodec-3-ene, -ethoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12 S.17'10]dodec-3-ene, -π-propoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12,s.17'10]dodec-3-ene, -/'-propoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17'10]dodec-3-ene, -/ butoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12,s.17'10]dodec-3-ene, -(2-methyIpropoxy)carbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17 l0]dodec-3-ene, -(1 -methylpropoxy)carbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12,s.17,10]dodec-3-ene, -f-butoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17'10]dodec-3-ene, -cyclohexyloxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, -(4'-f-butylcyclohexyloxy)carbonyItetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17,10]dodec-3-ene, -phenoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17,10]dodec-3-ene, -tetrahydrofuranyloxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17, 0]-3-dodecene, -tetrahydropyranyloxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12,s.17,10]dodec-3-ene, -acetyloxytetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, -methyl-8-methoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12-5.17/l0]dodec-3-ene, -methyl-8-ethoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, -methyl-8-A7-propoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17,10]dodec-3-ene, -methyl-8-/-propoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17,10]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-r?-butoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-(2-methylpropoxy)carbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17,10]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-(1-methylpropoxy)carbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12 S.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-f-butoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12,δ.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-cycIohexyloxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12,5.17'10]dodec-3-ene,
8-methyl-8-(4'-f-butylcyclohexyloxy)carbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17,10]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-phenoxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-tetrahydrofuranyloxycarbonyltetracyclo[4.4.0.1.17'10]-3-dodecene, 8-methyl-8-tetrahydropyranyIoxycarbonyltetracycIo[4.4.0.12,s.17,10]-3-dodecene, 8-methyl-8-acetyloxytetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17,10]dodec-3-ene,
8-methyl-8-cyanotetracyclo[4.4.0.12 o.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-di(methoxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17,10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-di(ethoxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-di(n-propoxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12 o.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-di(/-propoxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene,
8,9-di(t?-butoxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-di( -butoxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-di(cyclohexyloxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-di(phenoxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12,5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-di(tetrahydrofuranyloxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17 l0]-3-dodecene,
8,9-di(tetrahydropyranyloxycarbonyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]-3-dodecene, 8,9- dicarboxyanhydridetetracyclo[4.4.0.12,s.17'10]dodec-3-ene, tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene-8-carboxylic acid, 8-methyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene-8-carboxylic acid,
8-methyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12 S.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-ethyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12 o.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-fluorotetracyclo[4.4.0.12 o.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-fluoromethyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-difluoromethyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-trifluoromethyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-pentafluoroethyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17,10]dodec-3-ene, 8,8-difluorotetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-difluorotetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,8-bis(trifluoromethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12,5.17,10]dodec-3-ene,
8,9-bis(trifluoromethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-trifluoromethyltetracycIo[4.4.0.125.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,8,9-trifIuorotetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,8,9-tris(trifIuoromethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17|10]dodec-3-ene, 8,8,9,9-tetrafluorotetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene,
8,8,9,9-tetrakis(trifluoromethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,8-difluoro-9,9-bis(trifIuoromethyl)tetracycIo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-difluoro-8,9-bis(trifluoromethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.1 '5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,8,9-trifluoro-9-trifluoromethyltetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,8,9-trifluoro-9-trifluoromethoxytetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene,
8,8,9-trif!uoro-9-pentafluoropropoxytetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17,10]dodec-3-ene, 8-fluoro-8-pentafluoroethyl-9,9-bis(trifluoromethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-9-difluoro-8-heptafluoroisopropyl-9-trifluoromethyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8-chloro-8,9,9-trifluorotetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene, 8,9-dichloro-8,9-bis(trifluoromethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10]dodec-3-ene,
8-(2,2,2-trifluorocarboxyethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.12 o.1710]dodec-3-ene, 8-methyl-8-(2,2,2-trifluorocarboxyethyl)tetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17'10]dodec-3-ene, tricyclo[4.4.0.12'5]undeca-3-ene, tricyclo[6.2.1.01'8]undeca-9-ene, tetracyclo[4.4.0..12 o.17'10.01'6]dodec-3-ene,
8-methyltetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10.01'6]dodec-3-ene, 8-ethylidenetetracyclo[4.4.0.125.17 l2]dodec-3-ene, 8-ethylidenetetracyclo[4.4.0.12'5.17'10.01'6]dodec-3-ene, pentacyclo[6.5.1.13'6.02'7.09'13]pentadeca-4-ene, pentacyclo[7.4.0.12'5.1912.08'13]pentadeca-3-ene, 5-(n-hexyl)-bicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, 5-(triethoxysily)bicycIo[2.2.1 ]]hept-2-ene, and bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene-5-methoxy diphenyl methyl silane (also referred to herein as diphenyl methyl (norbornene methoxy) silane). Examples of polymerizable norbornene-type monomers include but are not limited to, norbornene (bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene), 5-methyl-2-norbomene, ethylnorbomene, propylnorbornene, isopropylnorbornene, butylnorbornene, isobutylnorbornene, pentylnorbornene, hexylnorbornene, heptylnorbornene, octylnorbornene, decylnorbornene, dodecylnorbornene, octadecylnorbornene, trimethoxysilylnorbornene, butoxynorbornene, p-tolylnorbomene, methylidene norbornene, phenylnorbornene, ethylidenenorbornene, vinylnorbornene, exo-dicyclopentadiene, endo-dicyclopentadiene, tetracyclododecene, methyltetracyclododecene, dimethyltetracyclododecene, ethyltetracyclododecene, ethylidenyl tetracyclododecene, phenyltetracyclodecene, tetramers of cyclopentadiene, propenylnorbornene, 5,8-methylene-5a,8a-dihydrofluorene, cyclohexenylnorbomene, dimethanohexahydronaphthalene, endo,exo-5,6-dimethoxynorbornene, endo,endo-5,6-dimethoxynorbornene, 2,3-dimethoxynorbornadiene, 5,6-bis(chloromethyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, 5-tris(ethoxy)silylnorbornene, 2-dimethylsilylbicyclo[2.2.1]hepta-2,5-diene, 2,3-bistrifluoromethylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hepta-2,5-diene,
5-fluoro-5-pentafluoroethyl-6-,6-bis(trifluoromethyI)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, 5,6-difluoro-5-heptafluoroisopropyl-6-trifluoromethyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-2-ene, 2,3,3,4,4,5,5,6-octafluorotricyclo[5.2.1.0]dec-8-ene, and 5-trifluoromethylbicyclo[2.2.1 ]hept-2-ene, 5-a-naphthyl-2-norbornene, 5,5-dimethyl-2- norbornene, 1,4,4a,9,9a,10-hexahydro-9,10[1\2']-benzeno-1,4-methanoanthracene, indanylnorbomene (i.e., 1,4,4,9-tetrahydro-1 ,4-methanofluorene, the reaction product of CPD and indene), 6,7,10,10-tetrahydro-7,10-methanofluoranthene (i.e., the reaction product of CPD with acenaphthalene), 1 ,4,4,9,9, 10-hexahydro-9, 10[1 ',2']-benzeno-1 ,4-methanoanthracene, endo,endo-5,6- dimethyl-2-norbornene, endo,exo-5,6-dimethyl-2-norbornene, exo,exo-5,6-dimethyl- 2-norbomene, 1,4,4,5,6,9,10,13, 14,14-decahydro-1,4-methanobenzocyclododecene (i.e., reaction product of CPD and 1 ,5,9-cyclododecatriene), 2,3,3,4,7,7-hexahydro-4,7-methano-1H-indene (i.e., reaction product of CPD and cyclopentene), 1,4,4,5,6,7,8,8-octahydro-1,4-methanonaphthalene (i.e., reaction product of CPD and cyclohexene),
1 ,4,4,5,6,7,8,9, 10,10-decahydro-1 ,4-methanobenzocyclooctene (i.e., reaction product of CPD and cyclooctene), and 1 ,2,3,3,3,4,7,7,8,8,decahydro-4,7-methanocyclopent[a]indene.
In another embodiment of the invention the polymer can be crosslinked during a post polymerization curing step (latent crosslinking). In this embodiment a norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant post crosslinkable functional group is copolymerized into the polycyclic backbone whereupon the functional group is subsequently crosslinked via well known techniques. By post crosslinkable functional group is meant that the functional group is inert to the initial polymerization reaction but is receptive to subsequent chemical reactions to effect the crosslinking of adjacent polymer chains. Suitable post crosslinkable monomers are set forth under Structure VII wherein at least one of R1 to R4 is selected from linear or branched C2-C10 alkenyl, C4-C10 cycloalkenyl, -(CH2)nSi(OR5)3, wherein n and R5 are as defined above, R1 and R2 or R3 and R4 can be taken together to represent a C,-C10 alkylidenyl radical, fused cyclic groups wherein R1 and R4 taken together with the two ring carbon atoms to which they are attached form an unsaturated C4 to C8 ring. In one embodiment, post crosslinkable alkenyl functional groups include vinyl, butenyl, and cyclohexyl. In one embodiment, alkylidenyl groups include methylidenyl and ethylidenyl substituents. In one embodiment, alkoxysilyl groups include trimethoxysilyl and triethoxysilyl moieties. In one embodiment, crosslinking agents containing fused multicyclic ring systems include dicyclopentadiene (DCPD) and unsymmetrical trimer of cyclopentadiene (CPD). Some exemplary latent corsslinking agents include, but are not limited to, the formulae shown below:
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000078_0002
Figure imgf000078_0003
where Rh represents a non-halogenated, halogenated or perhalogenated group such as CnQ"2n+1, n is an integer from 1 to 10, and Q" represents a hydrogen or a halogen (e.g., Br, CI, or F). The latent crosslinkable pendant groups can be reacted via a variety chemistries known to initiate the reaction of the various functional groups. For example, the alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, and alkylidenyl groups set forth under the definition R1 to R5 of Structure VII above can be crosslinked via a free radical mechanism. The alkoxysilyl groups can be crosslinked via a cationic reaction mechanism. Representative monomers that contain post crosslinkable functional groups are represented below.
Figure imgf000079_0001
In the latent crosslinking embodiment of the invention the crosslinking reaction step can be induced by a free radical initiator. Suitable initiators are those that can be activated thermally or photochemically. The initiator can be added to the reaction medium and the polymerization of the monomer mixture is allowed to proceed to completion. If the latent initiator is present during polymerization, then a key consideration is that the radical generating compound employed be stable (does not decompose) at the polymerization temperature of the monomeric reaction medium. Alternatively, the latent initiator can be added to a solution of the polymer in an appropriate solvent after the polymerization has been completed. When utilizing thermally activated free radical generators or embodiments utilizing photo- acid generators, latent crosslinking is induced by exposing the polymer medium to temperatures above the decomposition temperature of the free radical generating compound. In embodiments utilizing photoinitiated free radical generators, latent crosslinking is induced by exposing the polymer medium to a radiation source such as e-beam and UV radiation. Suitable free radical generator compounds (crosslinking agents) include the organic peroxides and aliphatic azo compounds. The aliphatic azo compounds are suitable initiators for the thermal and photochemical activated crosslinking embodiments of the invention, while the organic peroxides are suitable for use in as thermally activated initiators only. The amount of crosslinking agent employed ranges from about 0.005 part by weight to about 5.0 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight of monomer in the reaction medium.
Suitable organic peroxide include, but are not limited to, dibenzoyl peroxide, di(2,4-dichlorobenzoyl) peroxide, diacetyl peroxide, diisobutyryl peroxide, dilauroyl peroxide, t-butylperbenzoate, -butylperacetate, 2,5-di(benzoylperoxy)-1,2- dimethylhexane, di-f-butyl diperoxyazelate, f-butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, f-amyl peroctoate, 2,5-di(2-ethylhexanoylperoxy)-2,5-dimethylhexane, -butylperoxyneodecanoate, ethyl 3,3-di(f-butylperoxy)butyrate, 2,2-di(£-butylperoxy)butane, 1 ,1-di(f-butylperoxy)cyclohexane, 1 ,1-di(f-butylperoxy)- 3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexane, 2,5-di(-"-butylperoxy)-2,5-dimethylhex-3-yne, di-f-butyl peroxide, 2,5-di(f-butylperoxy)-2,5-dimethyIhexane, dicumyl peroxide, n-propyl peroxydicarbonate, /-propyl peroxydicarbonate, cyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate, and acetyl peroxydicarbonate.
Suitable azo compounds include, but are not limited to, 2,2'-azobis[2,4- dimethyl]pentane, 2-(^butylazo)-4-methoxy-2,4-dimethylpentanenitrile, 2,2'-azobis(/-butyronitrile), 2-(f-butylazo)-2,4-dimethylpentanenitrile, 2-( -butylazo)/- butyronitrile, 2-(-;-butylazo)-2-methylbutanenitriIe, 1,1-azobis-cyclohexanecarbonitrile,
1 -(f-amylazo)cyclohexanecarbonitrile, and 1 -( -butylazo)cyclohexanecarbonitrile.
Suitable photo-initiators for free-radical crosslinking include, but are not limited to, benzoin ethyl ether, diphenyl (2,4,6-trimethyl benzoyl) phosphine oxide, 4,4'- bis(diethylamino) benzophenone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino) benzophenone and 4- (dimethylamino) benzophenone.
Suitable photo-initiators for cationic crosslinking include, but are not limited to, onium salts, halogenated organic compounds, quinone diazide compounds, α,α- bis(sulfonyl)diazomethane compounds, α-carbonyl-α-sulfonyl diazomethane compounds, sulfone compounds, organic acid ester compounds, organic acid amide compounds, organic acid imide compounds, etc. Actual examples of onium salts are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups, diazonium salts with heterocyclic groups, ammonium salts, iodonium salts, sulfonium salts, phosphonium salts, arsonium salts, oxonium salts, etc. There are no restrictions to counter anions of these onium salts as long as they are compounds that can form counter anions. Examples are boric acid, arsenic acid, phosphoric acid, antimonic acid, sulfonic acid, carboxylic acid, and their halides. There are no special restrictions to the halogenated organic compound as long as they are halides or organic compounds, and a variety of conventional compounds can be employed. Actual examples include halogen-containing oxadiazole compounds, halogen-containing triazine compounds, halogen-containing acetophenone compounds, halogen-containing benzophenone compounds, halogen-contianing sulfoxide compounds, halogen-containing sulfone compounds, halogen-containing thiazole compounds, halogen-containing oxazole compounds, halogen-containing triazole compounds, haloge-containing 2-pyrone compounds, halogen-containing aliphatic hydrocarbon compounds, halogen-containing aromatic compounds, other halogen-containing heterocyclic compounds, sulfonyl halide compounds, etc. Actual examples of o-quinone diazide compounds are 1 ,2- benzoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid ester, 1 ,2-naphthoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid ester, 1 ,2-naphthoquinone diazido-5-sulfonic acid ester, 1,2-naphthoquinone diazido-6-sulfonic acid ester, 2,1-naphthoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid ester, 2,1- naphthoquinone diazido-5-sulfonic acid ester, 2,1-naphthoquinone diazido-6-sulfonic acid ester, other quinone diazido derivative sulfonic acid esters, 1,2-benzoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid chloride, 1,2-naphthoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid chloride, 1,2-naphthoquinone diazido-5-sulfonic acid chloride, 1 ,2-naphthoquinone diazido-6- sulfonic acid chloride, 2,1-naphthoquinone diazido-4-sulfonic acid chloride, 2,1- naphthoquinone diazido-5-sulfonic acid chloride, 2,1-naphthoquinone diazido-6- sulfonic acid chloride, and other quinone diazide derivative sulfonic acid chlorides. Examples of α,α-bis(sulfonyl)diazomethane compounds are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted α,α-bis(sulfonyl)diazomethane with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups, or heterocyclic groups, etc. Actual examples of α-carbonyl-α-sulfonyl diazomethane compounds are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted α-carbonyl-α-sulfonyl diazomethane with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, arakyl groups, aromatic groups, or heterocyclic groups. Actual examples of sulfone compounds are non-substituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted sulfone compounds or disulfone compounds with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups or heterocyclic groups. Actual examples of organic acid esters are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted carboxylic acid esters, sulfonic acid esters, etc., with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups or heterocyclic groups. Actual examples of organic acid amide groups are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted carboxylic acid amides, sulfonic acid amides, etc., with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups or heterocyclic groups. Actual examples of organic imides are unsubstituted or symmetrically or asymmetrically substituted carboxylic acid imides, sulfonic acid imides, etc., with alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, aralkyl groups, aromatic groups or heterocyclic groups. One or more of the photo-initiators can be utilized in the present invention.
When a latent initiator is present during polymerization or in the polymerization medium, the decomposition temperatures of the foregoing free radical generator compounds are well known in the art and can be selected on the basis of the polymerization temperatures employed in initial reaction. In other words the initiator compound must be stable at the polymerization temperatures so it is available for the post polymerization crosslinking reaction. As discussed above latent crosslinking is can be effected by thermal or photochemical means. As discussed above, monomers containing trialkoxysilyl groups can be crosslinked by latent crosslinking in the presence of a cationic initiator agent. A polymerization stable cationic initiator can be can be thermally activated to induce the latent crosslinking of the silyl groups. Suitable cationic crosslinking initiators include, for example, dibutyltin dilaurate, dimethyltin dilaurate, and dioctyltin dilaurate. The amount of multifunctional norbornene-type crosslinkable monomers and post crosslinkable monomers that are optionally present in the reaction mixture can range from about 0.1 mole percent to about 50 mole percent based on the total monomer in the monomer mixture to be reacted. In one embodiment, the amount of crosslinking agent ranges from about 1 mole percent to about 25 mole percent of the total monomer mixture. In another embodiment,the amount of crosslinking agent ranges from about 1 mole percent to about 10 mole percent of the total monomer mixture.
Monomer Polymerization The monomers of the invention are polymerized in solution or in mass. The catalyst is added to the reaction medium containing the desired monomer(s) as a preformed single component catalyst or the catalyst can be formed in situ by admixing the pro-catalyst component, the Group 15 electron donor component, and the WCA salt activator component in the reaction medium. When the pro-catalyst is ligated with the Group 15 electron donor component, it is not necessary to employ the Group 15 electron donor as a separate component. In one in situ embodiment the ligated pro-catalyst component (e.g., containing desired ligand group(s)) is admixed with the WCA salt activator component in the reaction medium. In another in situ embodiment a pro-catalyst component with or without ligands is admixed with a desired ligand containing component(s) and the WCA salt activator component in the reaction medium. The pro-catalyst components are generically exemplified in the preformed catalyst preparation equations (1) to (4) set forth above. In one embodiment, the molar ratio of pro-catalyst (based on the Group 10 metal) : Group 15 electron donor component : WCA salt is 1:1-10:1-100. In anther embodiment, the ratio is 1 :1 -5:1 -20. In yet another embodiment, the ratio is 1 :1-2:1-5. In embodiments of the invention where the pro-catalyst is ligated with a Group 15 electron donor ligand and/or a labile neutral electron donor ligand, the molar ratio of pro-catalyst (based on the metal content) to WCA salt is 1:1-100. In another embodiment, the ratio is 1 :1-20. In yet another embodiment, the ratio is 1:1-5. The order of addition of the various catalyst components to the reaction medium is not important.
The polymers prepared by the process of the invention are addition polymers of polycycloolefinic repeating units linked through 2,3-enchainment. The repeating units are polymerized from a polycycloolefin monomer or combination of polycycloolefin monomers that contain at least one norbornene-type moiety as described herein.
Solution Process In the solution process the polymerization reaction can be carried out by adding a solution of the preformed catalyst or individual catalyst components to a solution of the cycloolefin monomer or mixtures of monomers to be polymerized. The amount of monomer in solvent, in one embodiment, ranges from 10 to 50 weight percent. In another embodiment, the amount of monomer in solvent ranges from 20 to 30 weight percent. After the single component catalyst or catalyst components are added to the monomer solution, the reaction medium is agitated (e.g., stirred) to ensure complete mixing of catalyst and monomer components.
The polymerization reaction temperatures can range from about 0°C to about 150°C. In another embodiment, the polymerization reaction temperatures can range from about 10°C to about 100°C. In yet another embodiment, the polymerization reaction temperatures can range from about 20°C to about 80°C.
Examples of solvents for the polymerization reaction include but are not limited to alkane and cycloakane solvents such as pentane, hexane, heptane, and cyclohexane; halogenated alkane solvents such as dichloromethane, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, ethylchloride, 1,1-dichloroethane, 1 ,2-dichloroethane, 1- chloropropane, 2-chloropropane, 1-chlorobutane, 2-chlorobutane, 1-chloro-2-methylpropane, and 1-chloropentane; aromatic solvents such as benzene, xylene, toluene, mesitylene, chlorobenzene, anisole and o-dichlorobenzene, Freon® 112 halocarbon solvent, water; or mixtures thereof. In one embodiment, the solvent is selected from cyclohexane, toluene, mesitylene, dichloromethane, 1,2-dichloroethane, and water.
When an aqueous polymerization medium is desired, the Group 15 electron donor ligand or component may be chosen from the water soluble phosphines set forth above, although this is not a strict requirement. The polymerization reaction can be conducted in suspension or emulsion. In suspension, the monomers are suspended in an aqueous medium containing a suspension agent selected from one or more water soluble substances such as, for example, polyvinyl alcohol, cellulose ether, partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate, or gelatin and then carrying out the reaction in the presence of the catalyst system of the invention. The emulsion polymerization can in general be carried out by emulsifying the monomers in water or a mixed solvent of water and a water-miscible organic solvent (such as methanol, or ethanol). In one embodiment, this is done in the presence of at least one emulsifying agent. Then, the emulsion polymerization is carried out in the presence of the catalyst as discussed herein. Emulsifying agents include, for example, mixed acid soaps containing fatty and rosin acids, alkyl sulfonate soaps and soaps of oligomeric naphthalene sulfonates.
Mass Process In the mass polymerization process according to the invention at least one monomer component (e.g., at least one cycloolefinic monomer) is polymerized using a catalyst system. In another embodiment, the mass polymerization process according to the invention polymerizes at least one monomer crosslinking component (e.g., at least one cycloolefinic crosslinking monomer) using a catalyst system. In yet another embodiment, the mass polymerization process according to the invention is a two component monomer system (i.e. at least two cycloolefinic monomers of which none, one or two can be a crosslinking monomer) which is polymerized using a catalyst system. In still another embodiment, the mass polymerization process according to the invention is at least a three component monomer system (i.e. at least two cycloolefinic monomers of which at least one of which is a crosslinking monomoer) which is polymerized using a catalyst system. The term mass polymerization refers to a polymerization reaction which is generally carried out in the substantial absence of a solvent. In some cases, however, a small proportion of solvent is present in the reaction medium. Small amounts of solvent can be conveyed to the reaction medium via the introduction of the catalyst system components which are in some cases dissolved in solvent. Solvents also can be employed in the reaction medium to reduce the viscosity of the polymer at the termination of the polymerization reaction to facilitate the subsequent use and processing of the polymer. The amount of solvent that can be present in the reaction medium ranges from 0 to about 20 percent based on the weight of the monomer(s) present in the reaction mixture. In another embodiment, the amount of solvent that can be present in the reaction medium ranges from 0 to about 10 percent based on the weight of the monomer(s) present in the reaction mixture. In still another embodiment, the amount of solvent present that can be in the reaction medium ranges from 0 to about 1 percent, based on the weight of the monomer(s) present in the reaction mixture. In one embodiment, the solvent or solvents utilized are chosen such that the catalyst system components dissolve therein. Examples of solvents include, but are not limited to, alkane and cycloalkane solvents such as pentane, hexane, heptane, and cyclohexane; halogenated alkane solvents such as dichloromethane, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, ethylchloride, 1 ,1-dichloroethane, 1 ,2-dichloroethane, 1-chloropropane, 2-chloropropane, 1-chlorobutane, 2- chlorobutane, 1-chloro-2-methylpropane, and 1-chloropentane; esters such as ethylacetate, /-amylacetate; ethers such as THF and diethylether; aromatic solvents such as benzene, xylene, toluene, mesitylene, chlorobenzene, anisole and o-dichlorobenzene; and halocarbon solvents such as Freon® 112; and mixtures thereof. In one embodiment, the solvent or solvents is/are selected from benzene, fluorobenzene, o-difluorobenzene, p-difluorobenzene, pentafluorobenzene, hexafluorobenzene, o-dichlorobenzene, chlorobenzene, toluene, o-, m-, and p- xylenes, mesitylene, cyclohexane, ethylacetate, THF, and dichloromethane. A ligated pro-catalyst containing a Group 15 electron donor ligand is prepared in solvent and then added to the desired monomer or mixture of monomers containing the dissolved WCA salt activator. The reaction mixture is mixed and the reaction is permitted to proceed from about 1 minute to about 2 hours. The reaction mixture can be optionally heated at a temperature ranging from about 20 °C to about 200 °C. The polymerization temperature is not specifically limited. In one embodiment, the polymerization temperature is in the range of 20 °C to 120 °C. In another embodiment, the polymerization temperature is in the range of 20 °C to 90 °C.
The polymerization reaction can be carried out under an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon. Advantageously, however, it has been found that the catalyst system components of the invention are moisture and oxygen insensitive, allowing for less stringent handling and processing conditions. Following the initial polymerization reaction a polymer cement is obtained. The cement can be applied to a desired substrate or conveyed into a mold and post cured to complete the polymerization reaction.
Without wishing to be bound by theory of invention it is believed that post curing is desirable from the standpoint of monomer to polymer conversion. In a mass process the monomer is essentially the diluent for the catalyst system components. As monomer is converted to polymer a plateau is reached beyond which conversion of monomer to polymer can go no higher (vitrification). This conversion barrier results from the loss of reactant mobility as the reaction medium becomes converted to a polymeric matrix. Consequently, the catalyst system components and unconverted monomer become segregated and can not react. It is well known that diffusivity within a polymer decreases dramatically as the polymer passes from the rubbery state to the glassy state. It is believed that post curing at elevated temperatures increases the mobility of the reactants in the matrix allowing for the further conversion of monomer to polymer.
Post curing of the polymers of the present invention is, in one embodiment, conducted at elevated temperatures for a time period sufficient to reach a desired conversion of monomer to polymer. In one embodiment, the post curing cycle is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C. In another embodiment, the post curing cycle is conducted for about 0.5 to about 4 hours at a over a temperature range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C. In another embodiment, the post curing cycle is conducted for 1 to 2 hours over a temperature range of from about 125 °C to about 200 °C. In still another embodiment, the post curing cycle is conducted for 1 to 2 hours over a temperature range of from about 140 °C to about 180 °C. The cure cycle can be effected at a constant temperature or the temperature can be ramped, e.g., incrementally increasing the curing temperature from a desired minimum curing temperature to a desired maximum curing temperature over the desired curing cycle time range. In one embodiment (A) the temperature ramping can be effected by following a gradual increasing slope on a temperature vs. time plot from the desired minimum temperature to the desired maximum temperature in the cure cycle. In this embodiment when the maximum temperature is reached, the temperature maximum can optionally be held for a desired period of time until the desired cure state is attained. In an alternate embodiment (B) the temperature ramping can follow a stepwise curve on a temperature vs. time plot. In this embodiment the temperature ramping proceeds in step fashion from the desired minimum cure temperature to the desired maximum cure temperature in the cure cycle. In another embodiment (C) the post cure can be effected by combining post cure embodiments (A and B) wherein the cure cycle encompasses a combination of steps and slopes from the desired minimum cure temperature to the desired maximum cure temperature. In still another embodiment (D and E) the cure cycle can follow a curve from the desired minimum cure temperature to the desired maximum cure temperature. In embodiments A, B, and C it should be noted that the rise and run of the slope do not have to be constant between the minimum and maximum cure temperatures of the cure cycle. In other words the rise and run can vary when proceeding from the desired minimum to desired maximum cure temperatures The foregoing cure cycle temperature ramping curves are illustrated below.
Figure imgf000089_0001
Time
Ramping of the temperature during the cure cycle is advantageous because it diminishes the potential for catalyst degradation and the volatilization of unconverted monomer.
In another embodiment, the polymerization and the post-curing are both conducted together. In one embodiment, the polymerization/post-cure is conducted for 1 to 2 hours at a temperature in the range of from about 20 °C to about 200 °C. In another embodiment, the polymerization/post cure is conducted for 1 to 2 hours at a temperature in the range of from about 125 °C to about 200 °C. In still another embodiment, the post curing cycle is conducted for 1 to 2 hours over a temperature range of from about 140 °C to about 180 °C.
Alternatively, the polymerization/post-cure can be conducted at more than one temperature (i.e. within a range of temperatures). For example, the polymerization/post-cure can be conducted over a range of temperatures similar to the ranges given immediately above. If the polymerization/post-cure is being conducted within a range of temperatures, the temperature at which the polymerization/post-cure is being conducted can be altered according to the discussion had above with regard to temperature ramping.
Optionally, additives may include, but are not limited to, those selected from pigments, dyes, non-linear optical dyes, erbium complexes, praseodymium complexes, neodymium complexes, plasticizers, lubricants, flame retardants, tackifiers, antioxidants (e.g., Irganox® 1010, 1076, 3114, or Cyanox® 1790), UV stabilizers, masking agents, odor absorbing agents, crosslinking agents, synergists (e.g., Irgafos® 168, thiodipropionic acid dilauryl ester, or a combination of both), tougheners and impact modifiers, polymeric modifiers and viscosifiers and mixtures thereof (e.g., poly-iso-butylene, EPDM rubbers, siloxane oligomers and mixtures thereof), can be added by mixing one or more of them into the monomer medium . before the polymerization reaction is initiated. The identity and relative amounts of such components are well known to those skilled in the art and need not be discussed in detail here.
The optional additives are employed to enhance the processing, appearance and/or the physical properties of the polymer. For example, the additives can be utilized to enhance and modify inter alia the coefficient of thermal expansion, stiffness, impact strength, dielectric constant, solvent resistance, color, optical properties and odor of the polymer product. The viscosifiers are employed to modify the viscosity and shrinkage of the monomeric mixture before the polymerization reaction is initiated. Suitable viscosity modifiers include elastomers and the norbornene-type polymers of the present invention. The viscosity modifiers can be dissolved in the polymerizable monomers of the invention to increase the viscosity of the monomer reaction mixture. As discussed above, crosslinking can be effected during the initial polymerization reaction of the monomer mixture or during a post polymerization thermal or photochemical curing step.
In one embodiment, when a pro-catalyst is employed in the mass polymerization system of the invention, the molar ratio of monomer to pro-catalyst (based on metal content) to WCA salt activator ratios ranges from about 500,000:1 :1 to about 5,000:1:20. In another embodiment, the molar ratio of monomer to pro-catalyst (based on metal content) to WCA salt activator ratios ranges from about 250,000:1:5 to about 20,000:1 :10. In yet another embodiment, the molar ratio of monomer to pro-catalyst (based on metal content) to WCA salt activator ratios ranges from about 200,000:1 :20 to about 100,000:1 :1. Further information regarding the above can be found in International Patent Application Publication No. WO 00/20472 to The BFGoodrich Company, published on April 13, 2000, and International Patent Application Publication No. WO 00/34344 also to The BFGoodrich Company, published on June 15, 2000, both of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
Optical Waveguide Formulations:
In one embodiment, the polymer compositions for use in the present invention have from about 100 to about 100,000 repeating units as defined above by one or more of Structures VII, Vila and Vllb. In another embodiment, the polymer compositions for use in the present invention have from about 500 to about 50,000 repeating units as defined above by one or more of Structures VII, Vila and Vllb. In yet another embodiment, the polymer compositions for use in the present invention have from about 1,000 to about 10,000 repeating units as defined above by one or more of Structures VII, Vila and Vllb.
In one embodiment, a waveguide is formed using one of the methods disclosed below with at least two polyacrylate, polyimide, benzocyclobutene, cyclic olefin polymers, such that the core material and the clad material have a difference in their indices of refraction at 830 nm (Δn at 830 nm), core versus clad, of at least 0.00075 or more (or at least 0.05% when the clad refractive index is 1.5). That is, the refractive index of the polymer core layer is at least 0.05% greater than the refractive index of the at least one polymer cladding layer. If the waveguide is a three layer waveguide, the cladding layers (top cladding layer and sub-cladding layer) may be different polymers layers so long as both cladding layers have a refractive index which is at least 0.05% less than that of the polymer used to form the core layer.
In another embodiment, when the waveguide is to be formed from cyclic olefin monomers, both the core and cladding polymer layers of the optical waveguide of the present invention are formulated to include at least one cyclic olefin monomer (e.g., at least one norbornene-type monomers) and/or at least one crosslinking monomer, at least one pro-catalyst (see the discussion of pro-catalysts above under the Catalyst Preparation heading), at least one co-catalyst (i.e., a WCA salt having a weakly coordinating ion, see above), and optionally one or more of the additives discussed above (see the discussion under the Mass Process heading). Such a mixture is polymerized using the above-described mass polymerization process (see the discussion under the Mass Process heading) by either adding the pro-catalyst to a mixture containing the at least one cyclic olefin monomer, the co-catalyst, and any optional additives, or by adding the co-catalyst to a mixture containing the at least one cyclic olefin monomer, the pro-catalyst, and any optional additives. In both these situations the active catalyst is generated in situ.
In yet another embodiment, each of the clad and core formulations (which differ to the extent necessary to produce the required difference in their respective refractive indices) is formed from a 2-component system. That is, the clad formulation is produced from at least two components, Components A and B. On the other hand, the core formulation is also produced from at least two components,
Components C and D. Each of components A through D contain at least one norbornene-type monomer.
In another embodiment, Components A and B are two substantially identical mixtures of the at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking monomer. The difference between Components A and B generally arises from the inclusion of a pro-catalyst in Component A versus the inclusion of a co-catalyst in Component B. Additional differences between Component A and Component B may exist. For example, Component A may contain an optional additive not present in Component B, or vice versa. In one embodiment, Component A comprises at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking monomer, at least one pro-catalyst and optionally an additive as discussed above (such as an antioxidant). Whereas, Component B comprises the same norbornene-type monomer(s), the same crosslinking agent(s), at least one co-catalyst, and optionally an additive (such as an antioxidant) and/or a synergist. In this situation, polymerization is conducted using the Mass Process polymerization method by mixing equal amounts of Components A and B, thereby generating the active polymerization catalyst in situ.
Alternatively, each of the clad and/or clad formulations may be a one part mixture in which at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking monomer, at least one co-catalyst, and any optional additives are present. To cause the polymerization reaction to occur a pro-catalyst is added to the above mixture(s). In another embodiment, each of the core and/or clad formulations may be a one part mixture in which at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking agent, at least one pro-catalyst, and any optional additives are present. To cause the polymerization reaction to occur a co-catalyst is added to the above mixture(s). Again it is noted, that generally the clad and core formulations differ with respect to the at least one norbornene-type monomer and/or at least one crosslinking monomer present therein. It is this difference, in one embodiment, that permits the formation of polymers having the necessary difference in their respective refractive indices.
In another embodiment, each of the clad and/or core formulations contain at least one norbornene-type crosslinking monomer (as discussed above), at least one co-catalyst and any optional additives as discussed above. To cause the polymerization reaction to occur a pro-catalyst is added to the above mixture(s). Alternatively, the above mixture could be divided into two or more portions and the co-catalyst added to one portion while the pro-catalyst is added to another portion. In this instance, polymerization is accomplished by the combination of all of the portions.
In yet another embodiment, each of the core and/or clad formulation may be a one part mixture in which at least one norbornene-type crosslinking monomer, at least one pro-catalyst, and any optional additives are present. To cause the polymerization reaction to occur a co-catalyst is added to the above mixture(s). Again it is noted, that generally the clad and core formulations differ with respect to the at least one norbornene-type crosslinking monomer present therein. It is this difference, in one embodiment, that permits the formation of polymers having the necessary difference in their respective refractive indices. Alternatively, the above mixture could be divided into two or more portions and the co-catalyst added to one portion while the pro-catalyst is added to another portion. In this instance, polymerization is accomplished by the combination of all of the portions. Below are some exemplary clad and core formulations. It should be noted that these formations are exemplary in nature and are not meant to serve as an exhaustive list of the possible formulations for each of the clad and core. Rather, other clad and core formulations can be produced in view of the above disclosure so long as the refractive index of the polymer produced using the core formulation is at least 0.05% larger than that of the polymer produced using the clad formulation.
Exemplary Clad Formulations:
In one embodiment, the clad formulation contains: (1) one norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant C4 to C20 alkyl group, (2) one norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant C1 to C10 alkoxysilyl group, and (3) at least one crosslinking agent (as disclosed above). In addition to components (1), (2) and (3), the clad formulation also contains at least one pro-catalyst, at least one co-catalyst, and optionally an additive or additives as discussed above. As noted above, if components (1), (2) and (3) are all present in one mixture then either the pro-catalyst or the co-catalyst is held out of the mixture and added to the mixture at a later time. Alternatively, components (1), (2) and (3) can be divided into two or more portions and the pro-catalyst added to one portion to form Component A (which can optionally include an additive or additives). To another portion of components (1), (2) and (3) is added the co-catalyst to form Component B (which can optionally include the same, different or additional additives as Component A). Polymerization is accomplished in this embodiment by combining Component A and Component B
(along with any other portion of component (1), (2) and (3) not used to for Components A and B). In one embodiment, component (3) is at least one crosslinking agent selected from dimethyl bis(norbornenemethoxy) silane, octamethyl 1,8- bis(norbornenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane, bis(norbornenemethyl)acetal or a fluorinated crosslinking agent (such as F-Crosslinking Agents I and II shown above). Exemplary Core Formulations:
In one embodiment, the core formulation contains: (1) one norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant C4 to C20 alkyl group, (2) one norbornene-type monomer containing a pendant silane group with at least one C6 to C12 aryl group attached to the Si atom of the silane group, and (3) at least one crosslinking agent (as disclosed above). In addition to components (1), (2), and (3) the core formulation also contains at least one pro-catalyst, at least one co-catalyst, and optionally an antioxidant and/or a synergist. If components (1), (2) and (3) are all present in one mixture than either the pro-catalyst or the co-catalyst is held out of the mixture and added to the mixture at a later time. Alternatively, components (1), (2) and (3) can be divided into two or more portions and the pro-catalyst added to one portion to form Component A (which can optionally include an additive such an antioxidant). The other portion of components (1), (2) and (3) can be combined with the co-catalyst to form Component B (which can optionally include an additive such as an antioxidant and/or a synergist). In one embodiment, component (3) is at least one crosslinking agent selected from dimethyl bis(norbornenemethoxy) silane, octamethyl 1,8- bis(norbornenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane, bis(norbornenemethyl)acetal or a fluorinated crosslinking agent (such as F-Crosslinking Agents I and II shown above).
In one embodiment, the molar ratio, stated in mole percent, of component (1):component (2):component (3) in either the clad or core formulation is 60-90:5-
20:5-20. In another embodiment, the molar percent ratio of component (1):component (2):component (3) is 65-85:7.5-20:7.5-17.5. In still another embodiment, the molar ratio of component (1):component (2):component (3) is 75- 85:10-20:5-15. Examples of Crosslinking Agents: and Clad and Core Formulations:
The following examples are detailed descriptions of methods of preparation and use of certain compositions of the present invention. The detailed preparation descriptions fall within the scope of, and serve to exemplify, the more generally described compositions and formulations set forth above.
Additionally, in the examples below Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate is sometimes referred to in shorthand as LiFABA (see for example Table 2), and (allyl)palladium(tricyclohexylphosphine)trifluoroacetate is referred to as Allyl Pd-PCy3TFA.
X. Examples of Formation of Selected Crosslinking Agents:
(X1) Synthesis of dimethyl bis(norbornenemethoxy) silane:
Norbornene methanol (108.5 g, 0.87 mol.) is added dropwise to bis(dimethylamino) dimethyl silane (63.97g, 0.43 mol.) in a reactor which is connected to a scrubber containing dilute hydrochloric acid. The reaction mixture is stirred for about 4 hours. The mixture is then connected to a vacuum, and residual amounts of the amine are removed. Pure product is obtained by distillation under vacuum (117g, -90% yield).
The above reaction is also carried out using the dimethyl dichloro silane instead of bis(dimethylamino) dimethyl silane
To a vigorously stirred mixture of 5-norbornene methanol (50g, 0.40 mol.), triethyl amine (49g, 0.49 mol.) and toluene (400 mL), dimethyl dichlorosilane (25.8g, 0.20 mol.) is added dropwise. Stirring at room temperature results in the formation of salts. The crude product is isolated by filtration of the salts, washing the toluene solution with water (3 times) followed by evaporation of toluene. Distillation is conducted under vacuum to obtain pure product (53g, ~87% yield) (X2) Synthesis of octamethyl 1.8-bis(norbomenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane:
Norbornenemethanol (21.2g, 0.17 mol.) is added dropwise to a solution consisting of octamethyl dichlorotetrasiloxane (30g, 0.085 mol.), triethyl amine (21g, 0.21 mol.) and toluene (300 mL). The reaction mixture is stirred for 8 hours at room temperature. The solids that are formed (triethylamine hydrochloride) are filtered off. The toluene solution is then washed 3 times with small amounts of distilled water and the crude product is obtained by removing the toluene. Pure product is obtained by distillation under vacuum (39g, ~ 87% yield). (X3 Synthesis of BisfnorbornenemethvQacetal:
A mixture of norbornenemethanol (100g, 0.81 mol.), formaldehyde (-37%) (32.6g, 0.40 mol.) and a catalytic amount of p-toluene sulfonic acid (0.2g) are heated at 100 °C in a flask which is directly connected to a Dean Stark Trap. As the reaction proceeds, the amount of water in the trap increases. Within about 3 hours, the reaction is complete. Pure product is obtained by distilling under vacuum (72.8g,
-70% yield).
Examples of Clad Formulations (one Component): CL1 : Cladding Formulation using octamethyl 1 ,8-bis(norbomenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane: Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0200g, 2.3x10"5 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of monomers consisting of hexylnorbornene (10g, 0.056 mol.) octamethyl 1,8-bis(norbornenemethoxy) tetrasiloxane (3.9g, 8.6 mmol.) and triethoxysilylnorbornene (2.9g, 0.011mol.). To the mixture is added 0.17g of Irganox® 1076 (1 % by weight). To this mixture, is added 0.16 mL of catalyst stock solution (3.02 x10"6 mol.).
(Note: the stock solution was made up by dissolving 0.01 g of Allyl Pd-PCy3TFA in 1 mL of dry dichloromethane.)
Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained.
CL2: Cladding Formulation using Bis(norbornenemethyl)acetal:
Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0042g, 4.8x106 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of monomers consisting of hexylnorbonene (5g, 0.028 mol.), bis(norbomenemethyl)acetal (1.57, 6.1 mmol.) and triethoxysilylnorbornene (1.54, 6.1 mmol.). To this mixture is added 0.08g of Irganox® 1076 (1 % by weight). To this mixture, added 0.08 mL of catalyst stock solution (1.6 x10~6 mol.). (Note: the stock solution was made up by dissolving 0.01 g of Allyl Pd-PCy3TFA in 1 mL of dry dichloromethane.)
Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained. CL3: Cladding Formulation using F-Crosslinkinq Agent I:
Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0061 g, 6.9x106 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of monomers consisting of hexyl norbonene (6.2g, 0.035 mol), F-Crosslinking Agent I (3.2g, 4.3 mmol.) and triethoxysilylnorbornene
(1.11g, 4.3 mmol.). To the mixture is added 0.1 Og of Irganox® 1076 (1 % by weight).
To this mixture, added 0.1 mL of catalyst stock solution (1.7 x10"6 mol.). (Note: the stock solution was made up by dissolving 0.01 g of Allyl Pd-PCy3TFA in 1 mL of dry dichloromethane.) Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at
65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained. CL4: Cladding Formulation using F-Crosslinkinq Agent II:
Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0061 g, 6.9x106 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of monomers consisting of hexyl norbonene (6.2g,
0.035 mol), F-Crosslinking Agent II (3.6g, 4.3 mmol.) and triethoxysilylnorbornene (1.11g, 4.3 mmol.). To this mixture is added 0.10g of Irganox® 1076 (1 % by weight).
To this mixture, added 0.1 mL of catalyst stock solution (1.7 x10"6 mol.). (Note: the stock solution was made up by dissolving 0.01 g of Allyl Pd-PCy3TFA in 1 mL of dry dichloromethane.)
Cure/post-cure is conducted according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained. Example of Clad Formulation (two Component) CL5:
All monomers are degassed using dry nitrogen gas prior to use. Component A:
To a mixture of hexyl norbornene (33g, 0.185 mol.), triethoxysilyl norbornene (9.5g, 0.037 mol.) and dimethyl bis(norbornene methoxy) silane (7.5g, 0.0247mol.) is added Allyl Pd-PCy3TFA (0.0107g, 1.98 x 10"5 mol.) dissolved in 0.2 ml of dichloromethane. To this mixture is added 0.50g of Irganox® 1076. Component B:
Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) • 2.5 etherate (0.0689g, 7.91 x 10~5 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of triethoxysilyl norbornene (9.5g, 0.037 mol.) and dimethyl bis(norbornene methoxy) silane (7.5g, 0.0247mol.). Once the solids are completely dissolved, hexyl norbornene (33g, 0.185 mol.) is added to the mixture. Also added to the mixture, and dissolved therein, is Irganox® 1076 (0.50g). In addition to the antioxidant, 0.25 g of Irgafos® 168 is added as a synergist. Equal amounts of Components A and B are mixed together and are cured.
Cure/post-cure is conduced according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained.
The formulation of this example is shown in Table 2 below.
Figure imgf000100_0001
CO1. Example of Core Formulations (two Component):
All monomers are degassed using dry nitrogen gas prior to use. Component A:
To a mixture of hexyl norbornene (31.5g, 0.18 mol.), diphenyl methyl norbornene methoxy silane (11.3g, 0.035 mol.) and dimethyl bis(norbornene methoxy) silane (7.5g, 0.025mol.), is added Allyl Pd-PCy3TFA (0.0102g, 1.89 x 10"5 mol.) dissolved in 0.2 ml of dichloromethane. To this mixture is added 0.50g of Irganox® 1076. Component B:
Lithium tetrakis (pentafluoro phenyl borate) 2.5 etherate (0.0658g, 7.55 x 105 mol.) is dissolved in a mixture of diphenyl methyl (norbornene methoxy) silane (11.3g, 0.035 mol.) and dimethyl bis(norbomene methoxy) silane (7.5g, 0.0247 mol.) and hexyl norbornene (31.5g, 0.18 mol.). To this mixture is added, and dissolved therein, Irganox® 1076 (0.50g). In addition to the antioxidant, 0.25 g of Irgafos® 168 is added as a synergist.
Equal amounts of Components A and B are mixed together and are cured. Cure/post-cure is conduced according to the following schedule: 10 min. at 65 °C and 60 min. at 160 °C. After curing the monomer mixture, a clear and good optical quality film is obtained.
The formulation of this example is shown in Table 3 below.
Figure imgf000101_0001
Methods of Curing Cyclic Olefin Monomer Formulations and Producing Waveguides:
Cure/Post-Cure:
As discussed above under the Mass Process heading, the monomer formulations of the present invention are polymerized at a temperature of about
20 °C to about 200 °C for about 1 minute to about 2 hours. In another embodiment, the polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 120 °C for about 1 to about 40 minutes. In yet another embodiment, polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 40 °C to about 80 °C for about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes. As noted above, the polymerization reaction can be carried out under an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon. In another embodiment, the polymerization can be carried out in a forced air, vented oven.
After polymerization, the polymer may be subjected to a post curing step. In one embodiment, the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours at a temperature range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C (as noted above the temperature during post-cure can be increased over time). Additionally, in another embodiment, post-cure can be conducted for about 0.5 to about 4 hours at a temperature in the range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C. In another embodiment, the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range (or at a temperature in the range) of from about 125 °C to about
200 °C. In still another embodiment, the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range of (or at a temperature in the range) from about 140 °C to about 180 °C. Partial Cure/Cure/Post Cure: In another embodiment, at least one monomer formulation (e.g., either a core composition or a cladding (or clad) composition) is partially polymerized (cured) to gel point at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 120 °C for about 0.1 to about 10 minutes. In another embodiment, the polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 40 °C to about 100 °C for about 1 to about 8 minutes. In yet another embodiment, polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 50 °C to about 70 °C for about 2 minutes to about 6 minutes. As noted above, the polymerization reaction can be carried out under an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon. In another embodiment, the polymerization can be carried out in a forced air, vented oven.
After partial cure, at least one more monomer formulation (not cured) can be placed over or on top of the partially cured monomer formulation(s). In one embodiment, if at least one core composition is subjected to partial cure, then at least one clad composition is placed over the at least one core composition. In another embodiment, if at least one clad composition is subjected to partial cure, then at least one core composition is placed over the at least one core composition. In yet another embodiment, the at least one monomer formulation which is placed over the at least one partially cured monomer formulation can be another similar formulation (i.e., at least one additional core formulation over the at least one partially cured core formulation, etc.).
After the desired combination of monomer formulations is present (at least one of which is partially cured in accordance with the above discussion) the combination is cured at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 200 °C for about 1 minute to about 2 hours. In another embodiment, the polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 120 °C for about 1 to about 40 minutes. In yet another embodiment, polymerization occurs at a temperature of about 40 °C to about 80 °C for about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes. As noted above, the polymerization reaction can be carried out under an inert atmosphere such as nitrogen or argon. In another embodiment, the polymerization can be carried out in a forced air, vented oven.
After the combination of monomers has been cured (polymerized), the polymer combination may be subjected to a post curing step. In one embodiment, the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours at a temperature range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C (as noted above the temperature during post-cure can be increased over time). Additionally, in another embodiment, post- cure can be conducted for about 0.5 to about 4 hours at a temperature in the range of from about 100 °C to about 300 °C. In another embodiment, the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range (or at a temperature in the range) of from about 125 °C to about 200 °C. In still another embodiment, the post curing step is conducted for about 1 to about 2 hours over a temperature range of (or at a temperature in the range) from about 140 °C to about 180 °C.
Method of Making Waveguides: Clad First:
Conventional molding processes of fabrication of waveguides are done in a clad-first fashion. For example, shown in Figure 1 is a generic process of making a waveguide 1. First at (a) a cladding film 12 (sub-cladding) is formed by casting against a master 10 (a nickel master or other suitable master) in a molding process such as injection molding, hot embossing and reactive casting (see (a) of Figure 1) and subsequenting subjected to curing. The sub-cladding layer 12 is removed from the master 10 (see (b) of Figure 1) and a liquid core material 14 is then applied onto the featured side of the sub-cladding film 12 and forced into the grooves by pressure using, for example, a Doctor blade 16 (see (c) of Figure 1). Thereafter, the liquid core material 14 is cured to form a ribbed waveguide structure 14a (see (d) of Figure 1). It should be noted that the waveguide structure depicted in Figure 1 is ribbed. However, any suitable waveguide structure can be formed (e.g., a web, lattice, matrix, buried channels, etc.). Next, a top cladding layer 18 is formed over a portion or all of the waveguide structure 14a by a depositing thereupon a liquid clad material which upon curing forms the top cladding layer 18 (see (e) of Figure 1).
Alternatively, the top cladding layer 18 may be formed independently rather than being polymerized from a liquid formulation placed on top of the waveguide structure 14a, and optionally a portion of the sub-cladding layer 12. In such an embodiment, the top cladding layer 18 may be joined to the exposed portion of the waveguide structure 14a using a suitable adhesive attachment means (e.g., a layer of liquid cladding material which acts as a glue). In yet another embodiment, the method of Figure 1 can be halted after step (d) has been completed. In such a case, a two layer waveguide is obtained rather than the three layer wave guide discussed above.
Using one of the above clad-first approaches results in the production of two and three layer waveguides. Additionally, this conventional clad-first approach can yield a variety of waveguide structures such as an array of buried rib waveguides, as shown in Figures 2A to 2C. A careful balance of the dimensions (height, width, spacing, and thickness of the slab region) of the rib guides, along with control over the difference in the refractive index between the core and clad layers, and the operating wavelength can lead to a waveguide structure in which light is well confined (Figures 2B and 2C).
It should be noted that core/clad compositions disclosed herein can be used in other prior art waveguide formation methods (e.g., micro-molding/embossing; reactive ion etching; UV laser and e-beam writing; photochemical delineation; photo-bleaching; induced dopant diffusion (photo-induced dopant diffusion, photolocking and selective polymerization); selective poling of electro-optically active molecules induced by an electric field; and polymerization of self-assembled prepolymers
Additionally, the master used in this embodiment may have a waveguide structure whose channels are actually bigger than desired in the final product. Such features permit a non-stick coating (e.g., PTFE) or a mold-release agent to be applied over the master so as to facilitate removal of the sub-cladding layer 12 from the master 10. Alternatively, separation of the sub-cladding layer from the master may be facilitated by running cold water over the sub-cladding layer. Core-First Method:
Using the core-first method discussed below, a waveguide, even an isolated buried channel wave guide, can be formulated. For the purposes of this discussion, the method will be discussed in relation to an isolated buried channel waveguide. However, it is within the scope of this invention to form other waveguide structures (such as a ribbed structure). Compared with the conventional clad-first approach, the fabrication steps in the core-first approach are executed in reverse order, as shown in Figure 3. The general process is described as follows. A mixture of a core material 30 is poured onto the surface of a master 32 (e.g., Ni, Si masters, etc.) having grooves 34 formed in the shape and dimensions of the desired waveguide pre-structure (see (a) and
(b)). For example, for an isolated buried channel waveguide structure the channels are from about 1 μm to about 200 μm in width and from about 1 μm to about 200 μm in height. However, any desired thickness and height may be obtained so long as the channels are neither too narrow or too shallow to accept the core material. A Doctor blade 36 is set to rest directly on the surface of the master (where a buried structure is desired) and used to scrape away the excess liquid core mixture 30 (see (b) of Figure 3). Next, the core material 30 left in the grooves is cured to form at least one waveguide structure 30a. If the core material 30 is one of the core materials described above, the core material 30 can be cured in accordance with any one of the above-mentioned methods.
After the core material 30 left in the grooves is fully cured, as described above (see (c) of Figure 3), a mixture of a cladding material 38 is poured onto the top of the core containing master so as to cover the at least one exposed surface of the waveguide structure(s) 30a. The thickness of the sub-cladding layer is also controlled by a Doctor blade 36 (see (d) of Figure 3). Upon curing under the proper conditions, a sub-clad layer 40 is formed which is in contact with at least one surface of the waveguide structure(s) (see (e) of Figure 3). Next, the sub-clad layer 40/waveguide structure(s) 30a combination is removed from the master 32 and flipped over so that the sub-clad layer is on the bottom (see (f) of Figure 3). In one embodiment, the thickness of sub-clad layer is sufficient to allow for the removal of the sub-clad layer 40 and the waveguide structure(s) 30a from the master 32 without causing damage thereto. In another embodiment, the thickness of the each clad (sub-clad and top clad) is from about 2 μm to about 20,000 μm or are in total about 4 μm to about 20,000 μm. In yet another embodiment, the thickness of each clad layer is about 10 μm to about 10,000 μm, or are in total about 20 μm to about 10,000 μm. It should be noted that the height of the top-clad by definition includes the height of the core layer (see (h) of Figure 3).
Next, a top cladding material 42 is applied to the core side of the film and the thickness thereof is also controlled by a Doctor blade 36 (see (g) of Figure 3).
Thereafter, the top cladding material 42 is cured to form a top cladding layer 42a. Upon completion of the curing process of the top cladding layer a waveguide 50 is formed (see (h) of Figure 3). It should be noted, that curing of this third layer results in a three-layer polymer film containing isolated channel waveguide core 30a buried between the sub-cladding layer 40 and the top cladding layer 42a.
Alternatively, if a two layer optical waveguide is desired the above process is halted after step (f) is complete.
Additionally, the master used in this embodiment may have a core structure(s) which are actually bigger than desired in the final product. Such features permit a non-stick coating (e.g., PTFE) or a moid-release agent to be applied over the master to help facilitate the removal of the core structures 30a and the sub- cladding layer 40 from the master 32. Alternatively, separation of the sub-cladding layer from the master is facilitated by running cold water over the sub-cladding layer. Compared with the clad-first approach, this core-first approach makes the core structures of waveguides by casting on a master (e.g., Ni or Si) that has no interaction with the liquid core precursor. This modification in the fabrication process permits the complete removal of the slab region of the core layer and also enables an easy filling of fine channels by using a low-viscosity core prepolymer mixture, which simplifies the production of isolated, buried channel waveguides. Optical micrographs of samples of two-layer and three-layer waveguide structures made using the core-first method are shown in Figures 4A to 4D and, in one embodiment, the previously discussed cyclic olefin compositions (e.g., using the core and clad formulations discussed above). The waveguides of Figures 4A to 4D were produced using the clad composition detailed in Table 2 above, and the core composition detailed in Table 3 above. Figure 4A shows a two-layer isolated channel waveguide structure; Figure 4B shows a three-layer buried channel waveguide structure; Figure 4C is a schematic diagram of the end view of the waveguide array of Figure 4B (dimensions 13 μm wide, 16 μm tall, spaced by 13 μm) with the position of an input optical fiber shown as a shaded circle; and Figure 4D is a photograph of the waveguide output when light from a diode laser (λ = 820 nm) is coupled into a single core structure 30a as shown in Figure 4C. The output pattern shows that the guide is multimode at 820 nm and there is no cross coupling between adjacent guides.
The core-first method is also applicable to any other suitable polymer system which include, but are not limited to, polyacrylates (such as deuterated polyfluoro- methacrylate), polyimides (such as cross-linked polyimides or fluorinated polyimides), or benzocyclobutene.
With regard to Figures 5A and 5B, these figures depict the condition called "swelling". "Swelling" may occur during a clad-first approach for forming waveguides (see Figure 1). Although not wishing to be bound to any one theory, it is believed that swelling occurs during the polymerization of the core composition in the previously polymerized sub-cladding structure. In some instances "swelling" may be undesirable. Thus, using, for example, the above-mentioned core-first approach to waveguide formation (see Figure 3) it is possible to reduce and/or eliminate such "swelling". This is shown by comparing Figure 5A (formed using the above- mentioned clad-first approach) to that of Figure 5B (formed using the above- mentioned core-first approach).
Modified Core-First Method:
In another embodiment, the above-mentioned core first method can be modified to take advantage of the previously discussed partial cure/cure/postcure polymerization method (see above). For the purposes of this discussion, the method will be discussed in relation to an isolated buried channel waveguide. However, it is within the scope of this invention to form other waveguide structures (such as a ribbed structure). This modified core first method will be discussed with reference to Figures 6, 7A and 7B. Referring to Figure 6, the general modified core first process is described as follows. A mixture of a core material 60 is poured onto the surface of a master 62 (e.g., Ni, Si masters, etc.) having grooves 64 formed in the shape and dimensions of the desired waveguide structure (see (a) and (b)). For example, for an isolated buried channel waveguide structure the channels are from about 1 μm to about 200 μm in width and from about 1 μm to about 200 μm in height. However, any desired thickness and height may be obtained so long as the channels are neither too narrow or too shallow to accept the core material. A Doctor blade 66 is set to rest directly on the surface of the master (where a buried structure is desired) and used to scrape away the excess liquid core mixture 60 (see (b) of Figure 6). Next, the core material 60 left in the grooves is partially cured to form at least one pre-waveguide structure 60a. If the core material 60 is one of the core materials described above, the core material 60 is partially cured in accordance with the above-mentioned partial cure/cure/post cure method.
After the core material 60 left in the grooves is partially cured, as described above (see (c) of Figure 6), a mixture of a cladding material 68 is poured onto the top of the core containing master so as to cover the at least one exposed surface of the waveguide structure(s) 60a. The thickness of the sub-cladding layer is also controlled by a Doctor blade 66 (see (d) of Figure 6). Upon curing under the proper conditions (see the discussion under partial cure/cure/post cure above), a sub-clad film 70 is formed which is in contact with at least one surface of the waveguide structure(s) (see (e) of Figure 6). Next, the sub-clad layer 70/waveguide structure(s) 60a combination is removed from the master 62 and flipped over so that the sub- clad layer is on the bottom (see (f) of Figure 6).
In one embodiment, the thickness of sub-clad layer is sufficient to allow for the removal of the sub-clad layer 70 and the waveguide structure(s) 60a from the master 62 without causing damage thereto. In another embodiment, the thickness of the each clad (sub-clad and top clad) is from about 2 μm to about 20,000 μm or are in total 4 μm to about 20,000 μm. In yet another embodiment, the thickness of each clad layer is about 10 μm to about 10,000 μm, or are in total about 20 μm to about 10,000 μm. It should be noted that the height of the top-clad by definition includes the height of the core layer (see (h) of Figure 6).
Next, a top cladding material 72 is applied to the core side of the film and the thickness thereof is also controlled by a Doctor blade 66 (see (g) of Figure 6).
Thereafter, the top cladding material 72 is cured to form a top cladding layer 72a. Upon completion of the curing process of the top cladding layer a waveguide 75 is formed (see (h) of Figure 6). It should be noted, that curing of this third layer results in a three-layer polymer film containing isolated channel waveguide core 60a buried between the sub-cladding layer 70 and the top cladding layer 72a.
Alternatively, if a two layer optical waveguide is desired the above process is halted after step (f) is complete.
Additionally, the master used in this embodiment may have a core structure^) which are actually bigger than desired in the final product. Such features permit a non-stick coating (e.g., PTFE) or a mold-release agent to be applied over the master to help facilitate the removal of the core structures 60a and the sub- cladding layer 70 from the master 62. Alternatively, separation of the sub-cladding layer from the master is facilitated by running cold water over the sub-cladding layer. Compared with the clad-first approach, this modified core-first approach also makes the core structures of waveguides by casting on a master (e.g., Ni or Si) that has no interaction with the liquid core precursor. This modification in the fabrication process permits the complete removal of the slab region of the core layer and also enables an easy filling of fine channels by using a low-viscosity core prepolymer mixture, which simplifies the production of isolated, buried channel waveguides. Additionally, the modified core-first method reduces the amount of curing time necessary to produce a waveguide and reduces the amount of evaporation of the liquid core layer during the curing process thereby yielding fully filled buried waveguide structures. Optical micrographs of samples of two two-layer waveguide structures made using the core-first method (Figure 7A) and the modified core first method (Figure 7B) confirm that the modified core-first method permits the formation of fully filled buried waveguide structures. Multilayer Cutting Method: As shown in Figure 8, a double-layer polymer film 80 containing a thin layer of core material 82 (e.g., 25 μm) on top of a thick layer 84 of sub-cladding material (e.g., 100 μm thick) can be easily fabricated in a conventional film casting process. These layers may also be thicker or thinner as is discussed in relation to the thickness of the layers in the core-first method. Next, a master 86 having designed features 88a or 88b therein is used to form a modified core layer 82a or 82b having openings 90a or 90b therein. As shown in Figure 8, the openings 90a or 90b in modified core layer 82a or 82b penetrate through the core layer 82 and into the sub-cladding layer 84. In this method formation of the features in the core and cladding layers are accomplished by any suitable cutting technique (e.g., hot embossing, diamond cutting, laser ablation or reactive-ion etching (RIE), etc.). After formation of the modified core layer 82a or 82b, a top cladding layer is formed by applying a top cladding material to the double-layer polymer film having modified core layer 82a or 82b with openings 90a or 90b formed therein. The top cladding material is cured using any suitable method to yield a top cladding layer 92. During the formation of the top cladding layer 92, the top cladding material fills in the openings 90a or 90b so as to complete the formation of the buried waveguides 94a and 94b.
Buried waveguides 94a and 94b contain isolated core structures sandwiched between layers of, or surrounded by, or buried within the sub- and top cladding materials. Such waveguides can be used as basic components of integrated optical circuits in optoelectronic markets.
In another embodiment, a triple layer polymer film (i.e. a clad-core-clad multilayered film) is used to form a waveguide according to the method detailed in Figure 8. This fabrication approach is also applicable to not only the cyclic olefin monomer compositions discussed herein, but other polymer systems such as polyacrylates (such as deuterated polyfluoro-methacrylate), polyimides (such as cross-linked polyimides or fluorinated polyimides), or benzocyclobutene. In addition, other polymers may be used. These polymers include, but are not limited to, heat- curable mass polymerizable materials, photo-curable polymers and solution-based polymer materials.
Figures 9A to 9D are other examples of waveguides formed using a multilayer cutting method and the above discussed core/clad formulations. Figure 9A is an optical micrograph of a two-layer isolated channel waveguide formed using the multi-layer cutting method; Figure 9B depicts light from a diode laser (λ = 820 nm) being applied to the middle isolated channel structure of the waveguide of Figure 9A; Figure 9C is a three-layer isolated-buried channel waveguide formed by taking the two or three layer structure formed by the cutting method and overcoating the structure with clad material; and Figure 9D depicts light from a diode laser (λ =
820 nm) being applied to the middle isolated-buried channel structure of the waveguide of Figure 9C. It should be noted that when the photographs of Figures 9B and 9D were taken that the intensity of the input light from the diode laser is maximized to ascertain if any cross-talk exists between the isolated-buried waveguide structures. As can be seen from Figures 9B and 9D, the output patterns indicate that there is no cross coupling between adjacent waveguide structures. Although the invention has been shown and described with respect to a certain preferred embodiment or embodiments, it is obvious that equivalent alterations and modifications will occur to others skilled in the art upon the reading and understanding of this specification and the annexed drawings. In particular regard to the various functions performed by the above described integers (components, assemblies, devices, compositions, etc.), the terms (including a reference to a "means") used to describe such integers are intended to correspond, unless otherwise indicated, to any integer which performs the specified function of the described integer (i.e., that is functionally equivalent), even though not structurally equivalent to the disclosed structure which performs the function in the herein illustrated exemplary embodiment or embodiments of the invention. In addition, while a particular feature of the invention may have been described above with respect to only one of several illustrated embodiments, such feature may be combined with one or more other features of the other embodiments, as may be desired and advantageous for any given or particular application.

Claims

CLAIMS:What is claimed is:
1. A polycyclic polymer composition formed from one or more monomers or oligomers represented by the following structure:
Figure imgf000114_0001
wherein each X'" independently represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH2)n>- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5; "a" represents a single or double bond; R1 to R4 independently represent a hydrogen, a hydrocarbyl, or a functional substituent; and m is an integer from 0 to 5, with the proviso that when "a" is a double bond one of R1, R2 and one of R3, R4 are not present.
2. The polymer composition of claim 1 , provided that when any of R1 to R4 is a hydrocarbyl group, R1 to R4 independently comprises a hydrocarbyl, a halogenated hydrocarbyl or a perhalogenated hydrocarbyl group which are selected from: i) linear or branched CrC10 alkyl groups; ii) linear or branched C2-C10 alkenyl groups; iii) linear or branched C2-C10 alkynyl groups; iv) C4-C12 cycloalkyl groups; v) C4-C12 cycloalkenyl groups; vi) C6-C12 aryl groups; and vii) C7-C24 aralkyl groups.
3. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein X"1 is nitrogen having a hydrogen or a C, to C10 alkyl group.
4. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein R1 and R2, or R3 and R4 are taken together to represent a CrC10 alkylidenyl group.
5. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein one or more of R1 to R4 represent a functional substituent independently selected from -(CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-0-Si(Me)3, -(CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-O-CH2-0-CH3, -(CH2)n-CH(CF3)2-0-C(0)-0-C(CH3)3, -(CH2)n-C(CF3)2-OH, -(CH2)nC(0)NH2, -(CH2)nC(0)CI, -(CH2)nC(0)OR5, -(CH2)n-OR5, -(CH2)n-OC(O)R5, -(CH2)n-C(O)R5, -(CH2)n-OC(0)OR5, -(CH2)nSi(R5)3, -(CH2)nSi(OR5)3, -(CH2)n-0-Si(R5)3, and -(CH2)nC(0)OR6, wherein n independently represents an integer from 0 to 10, R5 independently represents a hydrogen, a linear or branched C,_C20 alkyl group, a linear or branched C,_C20 halogenated or perhalogenated alkyl group, a linear or branched C2-C10 alkenyl group, a linear or branched C2-C10 alkynyl group, a C5-C12 cycloalkyl group, a C6-C14 aryl group, a C6-C14 halogenated or perhalogenated aryl group, and a C7-C24 aralkyl group; and R6 is selected from -C(CH3)3, -Si(CH3)3, -CH(R7)OCH2CH3, -CH(R7)OC(CH3)3 or one of the following cyclic groups:
Figure imgf000115_0001
or one of the following:
CH , and -C(CH3)2 wherein R7 represents a hydrogen or a linear or branched (C, - C5) alkyl group.
6. The polymer composition of claim 4, wherein R5 is a halogenated or perhalogenated group.
7. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein R1 and R4 are taken together with the two ring carbon atoms to which they are attached to represent a substituted or unsubstituted cycloaliphatic group containing 4 to 30 ring carbon atoms or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group containing 6 to 18 ring carbon atoms or combinations thereof.
8. The polymer composition of claim 6, wherein the cycloaliphatic group is a monocyclic or polycyclic cycloaliphatic group.
9. The polymer composition of claim 7, wherein the cycloaliphatic group is monounsaturated or multiunsaturated.
10. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein the composition is a homopolymer.
11. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein the composition is a copolymer comprising at least two different repeating units according to the structure of claim 1.
12. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 100 to about 100,000.
13. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 500 to about 50,000.
14. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 1,000 to about 10,000.
15. The polymer composition of claim 1 , wherein the polymer composition is formed from one or more monomers or oligomers according to claim 1 in combination with one or more crosslinking agents.
16. The polymer composition of claim 15, wherein the crosslinking agent is selected from at least one of the following structures:
Figure imgf000117_0001
nlϊD a nJ M xl
wherein Y represents a methylene (-CH2-) group and m independently represents an integer from 0 to 5, and when m is 0, Y represents a single bond; a linked multicyclic crosslinking agent as shown in Structure VIII below:
Figure imgf000117_0002
wherein "a" independently represents a single or double bond, m independently is an integer from 0 to 5, R9 is a divalent radical selected from divalent hydrocarbyl radicals, divalent ether radicals and divalent silyl radicals, and n is 0 or 1; or a crosslinking agent as shown below:
Figure imgf000118_0001
Figure imgf000118_0002
Figure imgf000118_0003
where n is 1 to 4.
17. The polymer composition of claim 15, wherein the crosslinking agent is selected from at least one of the following structures:
Figure imgf000118_0004
Figure imgf000119_0001
18. The polymer composition of claim 15, the crosslinking agent is selected from at least one of the following structures:
Figure imgf000119_0002
Figure imgf000119_0004
Figure imgf000119_0005
Figure imgf000119_0003
Figure imgf000119_0006
where m and n, if present, are independently an integer from 1 to 4.
19. The polymer composition of claim 15, the crosslinking agent is selected from at least one of the following structures:
Figure imgf000120_0001
and
Figure imgf000120_0002
20. The composition of claim 15, wherein the crosslinking agent is a latent crosslinking agent.
21. The composition of claim 20, wherein latent crosslinking agent is selected from one or more of the following compounds:
Figure imgf000120_0003
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000121_0002
Figure imgf000121_0003
where Rh represents a non-halogenated, halogenated or perhalogenated group such as CnQ"2n+1, n is an integer from 1 to 10, and Q" represents a hydrogen or a halogen.
22. A polycyclic polymer composition formed from one or more monomers or oligomers represented by the following structure:
Figure imgf000121_0004
wherein each X'" independently represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH2)n.- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5; Q represents an oxygen atom or the group N(R8); R8 is selected from hydrogen, a halogen, a linear or branched C C10 alkyl, and C6-C18 aryl; and m is an integer from 0 to 5.
23. The polymer composition of claim 22, wherein the composition is a homopolymer.
24. The polymer composition of claim 22, wherein the composition is a copolymer.
25. The polymer composition of claim 22, wherein X'" is nitrogen having a hydrogen or a C, to C10 alkyl group.
26. The polymer composition of claim 22, wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 100 to about 100,000.
27. The polymer composition of claim 22, wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 500 to about 50,000.
28. The polymer composition of claim 22, wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 1 ,000 to about 10,000.
29. The polymer composition of claim 22, wherein the polymer composition is formed from one or more monomers or oligomers according to claim 22 in combination with one or more crosslinking agents.
30. The composition of claim 29, wherein the at least one crosslinking agent is selected from one or more of the following compounds:
Figure imgf000123_0001
wherein Y represents a methylene (-CH2-) group and m independently represents an integer from 0 to 5, and when m is 0, Y represents a single bond; a linked multicyclic crosslinking agent as shown in Structure VIII below:
Figure imgf000123_0002
wherein "a" independently represents a single or double bond, m independently is an integer from 0 to 5, R9 is a divalent radical selected from divalent hydrocarbyl radicals, divalent ether radicals and divalent silyl radicals, and n is 0 or 1; or a crosslinking agent as shown below:
Figure imgf000123_0003
Figure imgf000123_0004
Figure imgf000124_0001
where n is 1 to 4.
31. The polymer composition of claim 29, wherein the at least one crosslinking agent is selected from one or more of the following compounds:
Figure imgf000124_0002
Figure imgf000124_0003
Figure imgf000125_0001
Figure imgf000125_0002
32. The polymer composition of claim 29, wherein the at least one crosslinking agent is selected from one or more of the following compounds:
Figure imgf000125_0003
Figure imgf000126_0002
Figure imgf000126_0003
Figure imgf000126_0001
Figure imgf000126_0004
where m and n, if present, are independently an integer from 1 to 4.
33. The polymer composition of claim 29, wherein the at least one crosslinking agent is selected from one or more of the following compounds
Figure imgf000126_0005
and
Figure imgf000126_0006
34. The composition of claim 29, wherein the crosslinking agent is a latent crosslinking agent.
35. The composition of claim 34, wherein latent crosslinking agent is selected from one or more of the following compounds:
Figure imgf000127_0001
Figure imgf000127_0002
Figure imgf000127_0003
where Rh represents a non-halogenated, halogenated or perhalogenated group such as CnQ"2n+1, n is an integer from 1 to 10, and Q" represents a hydrogen or a halogen.
36. A polycyclic polymer composition formed from one or more monomers represented by the following structure:
Figure imgf000128_0001
wherein X"' represents oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, or a methylene group of the formula -(CH2)n- where n' is an integer of 1 to 5; RD is deuterium, "i" is an integer ranging from 0 to 6, with the proviso that when "i" is 0, at least one of R1D and R2D must be present; R1 and R2 independently represent a hydrogen, a hydrocarbyl, or a functional substituent; and R1D and R2D, which are optional, independently represent a deuterium atom or a deuterium enriched hydrocarbyl group containing at least one deuterium atom.
37. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein X"' is nitrogen having a hydrogen or a C, to C10 alkyl group.
38. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 100 to about 100,000.
39. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 500 to about 50,000.
40. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein the number of repeating units in the composition is from about 1 ,000 to about 10,000.
41. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein at least one of R1D and R2D are present and R1D and R2D are independently selected from linear or branched C C10 alkyl, wherein at least 40 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium.
42. The polymer composition of claim 41 , wherein both R1D and R2D are present.
43. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein at least one of R1D and R2D are present and R1D and R2D are independently selected from a linear or branched C,-C10 alkyl, wherein at least 50 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium.
44. The polymer composition of claim 43, wherein both R1D and R2D are present.
45. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein at least one of R1D and R2D are present and R1D and R2D are independently selected from a linear or branched C,-C10 alkyl, wherein at least 60 percent of the hydrogen atoms on the carbon backbone are replaced by deuterium.
46. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein both R1D and R2D are present.
47. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein the polymer composition is formed in combination with at least one crosslinking agent.
48. The polymer composition of claim 36, wherein the polymer composition is formed from a combination of (A) one or more monomers according to claim 30 with (B) one or more oligomers derived from the monomers of claim 30
49. A polymer composition according to claim 1 for use in waveguides.
50. A polymer composition according to claim 22 for use in waveguides.
51. A polymer composition according to claim 36 for use in waveguides.
PCT/US2001/023732 2000-07-28 2001-07-27 Polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides; optical waveguides formed therefrom; and methods for making same WO2002010231A2 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020037001304A KR100804249B1 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-07-27 Polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides? optical waveguides formed therefrom?and methods for making same
AU2001280856A AU2001280856A1 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-07-27 Polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides; optical waveguides formed therefrom; and methods for making same
JP2002515959A JP5218713B2 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-07-27 Polymer compositions for forming optical waveguides; optical waveguides formed therefrom; and methods for making the same
EP01959283A EP1307493A2 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-07-27 Polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides; optical waveguides formed therefrom; and methods for making same

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US22142000P 2000-07-28 2000-07-28
US60/221,420 2000-07-28
US25225100P 2000-11-21 2000-11-21
US60/252,251 2000-11-21

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2002010231A2 true WO2002010231A2 (en) 2002-02-07
WO2002010231A3 WO2002010231A3 (en) 2002-07-11

Family

ID=26915771

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2001/023732 WO2002010231A2 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-07-27 Polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides; optical waveguides formed therefrom; and methods for making same
PCT/US2001/023692 WO2002010810A2 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-07-27 Optical waveguides and methods for making the same

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2001/023692 WO2002010810A2 (en) 2000-07-28 2001-07-27 Optical waveguides and methods for making the same

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (2) US6538087B2 (en)
EP (2) EP1307493A2 (en)
JP (2) JP5218713B2 (en)
KR (2) KR100804249B1 (en)
CN (1) CN1555387A (en)
AU (2) AU2001280856A1 (en)
TW (1) TW534913B (en)
WO (2) WO2002010231A2 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003100487A1 (en) * 2002-05-24 2003-12-04 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Polymer micro-ring resonator device and fabrication method
WO2004035636A2 (en) * 2002-10-15 2004-04-29 Promerus, Llc Polymerized cycloolefins using transition metal catalyst and end products thereof
US6825307B2 (en) 1998-10-05 2004-11-30 Promerus, Llc Catalyst and methods for polymerizing cycloolefins
CN1304861C (en) * 2002-06-27 2007-03-14 松下电器产业株式会社 Optical waveguide and method for mfg. same
CN100371357C (en) * 2004-03-26 2008-02-27 罗姆和哈斯公司 Catalyst complexes for polymerization and co-polymerization of cyclic olefins
US7820356B2 (en) 2003-11-21 2010-10-26 Sumitomo Bakelite Co. Ltd. Optical waveguides and methods thereof
US8329841B2 (en) 2007-03-22 2012-12-11 Lg Chem, Ltd. Photoreactive polymer and method for preparing the same
US8378064B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2013-02-19 Trustees Of Boston University Hydrophilic polymers as medical lubricants and gels

Families Citing this family (78)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8128856B2 (en) * 1995-11-15 2012-03-06 Regents Of The University Of Minnesota Release surfaces, particularly for use in nanoimprint lithography
EP2045334A1 (en) 1998-06-24 2009-04-08 Illumina, Inc. Decoding of array sensors with microspheres
US6628876B1 (en) * 2000-09-15 2003-09-30 Triquint Technology Holding Co. Method for making a planar waveguide
KR100816931B1 (en) * 2000-10-04 2008-03-25 제이에스알 가부시끼가이샤 Composition of Cyclic Olefin Addition Copolymer and Cross-Linked Material
JP2002179875A (en) * 2000-12-08 2002-06-26 Jsr Corp Heat-resistant resin composition
JP4217862B2 (en) * 2001-06-27 2009-02-04 日本ゼオン株式会社 Laminated body and light reflecting sheet
US20040024157A1 (en) * 2001-12-25 2004-02-05 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Optical member, polymerizable composition and method for preparing thereof
JP3858995B2 (en) * 2002-07-02 2006-12-20 オムロン株式会社 Manufacturing method of optical waveguide device
CN1808196A (en) * 2002-07-02 2006-07-26 欧姆龙株式会社 Optical waveguide device, manufacturing method thereof, and optical communication apparatus
KR101000043B1 (en) * 2002-09-20 2010-12-09 도판 인사츠 가부시키가이샤 Optical wave guide and method of manufacturing the same
US7019093B2 (en) * 2002-10-18 2006-03-28 Dow Global Technologies Inc. Aqueous developable, photosensitive benzocyclobutene-based oligomers and polymers with high moisture resistance
KR100529371B1 (en) * 2003-07-29 2005-11-21 주식회사 엘지화학 Catalyst precursor resin composition and preparation method of light-penetrating electro-magnetic interference shielding material using the same
JP2005181958A (en) * 2003-12-22 2005-07-07 Rohm & Haas Electronic Materials Llc Method for forming electronic component and optical component by using laser ablasion
US7101654B2 (en) * 2004-01-14 2006-09-05 Promerus Llc Norbornene-type monomers and polymers containing pendent lactone or sultone groups
US7378456B2 (en) * 2004-01-30 2008-05-27 Promerus Llc Directly photodefinable polymer compositions and methods thereof
ATE541231T1 (en) * 2004-06-25 2012-01-15 Omron Tateisi Electronics Co PROCESS FOR PRODUCTION OF AN OPTICAL FILM WAVEGUIDE
DE602005011017D1 (en) * 2004-07-07 2008-12-24 Promerus Llc LENS-SENSITIVE DIELECTRIC RESIN COMPOSITIONS AND ITS USES
US7875686B2 (en) * 2004-08-18 2011-01-25 Promerus Llc Polycycloolefin polymeric compositions for semiconductor applications
US7346259B1 (en) * 2004-08-18 2008-03-18 University Of Washington Thermally reversibly crosslinkable polymer as cladding material for electro-optic devices
JP2006126824A (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-05-18 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Optical waveguide
KR100789247B1 (en) * 2005-01-05 2008-01-02 주식회사 엘지화학 Photoreactive polymer and process of making the same
EA200701853A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2008-08-29 Пфайзер Продактс Инк. DERIVATIVES OF CYCLOPENTAPIRIDINE AND TETRAHYDROCHINOLINE
JP4696679B2 (en) * 2005-05-19 2011-06-08 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure
JP4696684B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-06-08 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide and optical waveguide structure
JP4696683B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-06-08 住友ベークライト株式会社 Manufacturing method of optical waveguide
JP4760127B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-08-31 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure
JP4696680B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-06-08 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide and optical waveguide structure
JP4696681B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-06-08 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide and optical waveguide structure
JP4760130B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-08-31 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure
JP4760129B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-08-31 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure
JP4760128B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-08-31 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure and optical waveguide substrate
JP4696682B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-06-08 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide and optical waveguide structure
JP4760126B2 (en) * 2005-05-20 2011-08-31 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure
JP4752328B2 (en) * 2005-05-23 2011-08-17 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure
JP4760134B2 (en) * 2005-05-23 2011-08-31 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure
JP4760133B2 (en) * 2005-05-23 2011-08-31 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide structure
US20070138699A1 (en) * 2005-12-21 2007-06-21 Asml Netherlands B.V. Imprint lithography
US8628819B2 (en) * 2006-02-24 2014-01-14 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Method of depositing a nanoparticle coating on a bipolar plate and removing the nanoparticle coating from the lands of the bipolar plate
ATE490484T1 (en) * 2006-03-17 2010-12-15 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv OPTICAL DEVICE WITH CHANNEL WAVE GUIDE STRUCTURE AND PRODUCTION METHOD THEREOF
US7625515B2 (en) * 2006-06-19 2009-12-01 Iowa State University Research Foundation, Inc. Fabrication of layer-by-layer photonic crystals using two polymer microtransfer molding
WO2008002066A1 (en) * 2006-06-26 2008-01-03 Lg Chem, Ltd. Method for preparing norbornene monomer composition, norbornene polymer prepared therefrom, optical film comprising the norbornene polymer, and method for preparing the norbornene polymer
WO2008007673A1 (en) * 2006-07-13 2008-01-17 Nippon Steel Chemical Co., Ltd. Flexible light guide and laminate board for optical/electrical composite wiring board
EP2083293A4 (en) 2006-11-16 2010-09-01 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Light guide and light guide structure
JP4872735B2 (en) * 2007-03-19 2012-02-08 住友ベークライト株式会社 Novel optical waveguide using polynorbornene containing maleimide group
GB2467316B (en) * 2009-01-28 2014-04-09 Pragmatic Printing Ltd Electronic devices, circuits and their manufacture
JP2008304947A (en) * 2008-09-11 2008-12-18 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Optical waveguide and optical waveguide structure
KR100988300B1 (en) * 2008-10-21 2010-10-18 부산대학교 산학협력단 Manufacturing method of multilayered polymer photonic integrated circuit
JP5251502B2 (en) * 2008-12-27 2013-07-31 住友ベークライト株式会社 Optical waveguide
KR100982394B1 (en) * 2009-01-12 2010-09-14 주식회사 엘지화학 Norbornene polymer comprising photoreactive functional group with halogen substituents, method for preparing the same, and algnment layer using the same
JP2009102654A (en) * 2009-02-05 2009-05-14 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Optical waveguide structure
US9400219B2 (en) * 2009-05-19 2016-07-26 Iowa State University Research Foundation, Inc. Metallic layer-by-layer photonic crystals for linearly-polarized thermal emission and thermophotovoltaic device including same
EP2611842B1 (en) 2010-09-02 2015-11-04 Merck Patent GmbH Interlayer for electronic devices
CN105038069B (en) 2010-09-02 2017-10-17 默克专利股份有限公司 Gate insulation layer for electronic device
US8829087B2 (en) 2010-12-14 2014-09-09 Promerus, Llc Transparent layer forming polymer
JP5229309B2 (en) * 2010-12-17 2013-07-03 住友ベークライト株式会社 Manufacturing method of optical waveguide
DE102010056519A1 (en) * 2010-12-27 2012-06-28 Heliatek Gmbh Optoelectronic component with doped layers
US8742406B1 (en) 2011-02-16 2014-06-03 Iowa State University Research Foundation, Inc. Soft lithography microlens fabrication and array for enhanced light extraction from organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs)
JP5126380B2 (en) * 2011-04-01 2013-01-23 住友ベークライト株式会社 Manufacturing method of optical waveguide
JP4983990B2 (en) * 2011-04-06 2012-07-25 住友ベークライト株式会社 Method for manufacturing optical waveguide structure
CN103105962B (en) * 2011-11-09 2016-04-06 宸鸿科技(厦门)有限公司 Contact panel, touch electrode structure and preparation method thereof
KR101956961B1 (en) 2012-02-15 2019-06-24 메르크 파텐트 게엠베하 Planarization layer for organic electronic devices
SG11201406802VA (en) 2012-04-25 2014-11-27 Merck Patent Gmbh Bank structures for organic electronic devices
US9425417B2 (en) 2012-09-21 2016-08-23 Merck Patent Gmbh Polycycloolefinic polymer formulation for an organic semiconductor
EP2904648B1 (en) 2012-10-04 2016-09-21 Merck Patent GmbH Passivation layers for organic electronic devices
CN104781945B (en) 2012-11-08 2019-09-03 默克专利股份有限公司 Manufacture the method with the organic electronic device of embankment structure, embankment structure and with the electronic device obtained by it
WO2016130580A1 (en) * 2015-02-10 2016-08-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Method of fabricating tungsten scandate nano-composite powder for cathodes
TWI675059B (en) * 2015-09-01 2019-10-21 日商住友電木股份有限公司 Polycycloolefin polymer compositions as optical materials
US20170342199A1 (en) * 2016-05-24 2017-11-30 Industrial Technology Research Institute Oligomer, composition and composite material employing the same
JP2018017973A (en) * 2016-07-29 2018-02-01 株式会社フジクラ Wiring body and manufacturing method of the same
TWI612340B (en) * 2016-08-16 2018-01-21 奇景光電股份有限公司 Transparent rib structure, composite optical prism and method for forming optical prism
WO2019059318A1 (en) * 2017-09-21 2019-03-28 Agc株式会社 Fluorine-containing compound, fluorine-containing polymer, and method for producing fluorine-containing polymer
WO2020002277A1 (en) 2018-06-28 2020-01-02 Merck Patent Gmbh Method for producing an electronic device
WO2020165270A1 (en) 2019-02-12 2020-08-20 The University Of Southampton Device comprising piezoelectrically active layer and method for producing such device
US11067749B2 (en) * 2019-11-21 2021-07-20 Globalfoundries U.S. Inc. Waveguides with cladding layers of gradated refractive index
CN113121940B (en) * 2019-12-31 2022-12-30 广东生益科技股份有限公司 Thermosetting resin composition, and prepreg, laminated board and printed wiring board using thermosetting resin composition
US11555956B2 (en) 2020-02-28 2023-01-17 Chromis Fiberoptics, Inc. Polymer optical fiber with tunable, hydrolytically stable overcladding
US20210316255A1 (en) * 2020-04-13 2021-10-14 Chromis Fiberoptics, Inc. Gas separation articles composed of amorphous crosslinked fluorinated copolymers and methods of making and using thereof
WO2022051303A1 (en) * 2020-09-01 2022-03-10 Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Of The University Of Arizona Refractive index contrast polymers and methods for producing and using the same

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE4104392A1 (en) 1991-02-14 1992-08-20 Hoechst Ag Light wave guide and new polymers - are based on poly:norbornene or poly:norbornadiene prods. partic. contg. fluoro or fluoro-alkyl substits.
GB2332902A (en) 1997-12-31 1999-07-07 Hyundai Electronics Ind Bicycloalkene derivatives and polymers thereof
GB2340830A (en) 1998-08-26 2000-03-01 Hyundai Electronics Ind Novel monomers for photoresist, polymers thereof and photoresist compositions using the same
WO2000020472A1 (en) 1998-10-05 2000-04-13 The B.F. Goodrich Company Catalyst and methods for polymerizing cycloolefins
WO2000034344A1 (en) 1998-12-09 2000-06-15 The B.F.Goodrich Company In mold addition polymerization of norbornene-type monomers using group 10 metal complexes

Family Cites Families (44)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS61138903A (en) * 1984-12-12 1986-06-26 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Production of optical waveguide
EP0281086B1 (en) * 1987-03-05 1994-04-20 The B.F. Goodrich Company Polycycloolefin polymer alloys utilizing dispersed ethylene-based functional polymers
US4857426A (en) 1987-08-01 1989-08-15 The British Petroleum Company P.L.C. Photo polymers and uses thereof
JP3140752B2 (en) * 1987-10-01 2001-03-05 ザ ビー.エフ.グッドリッチ カンパニー Method for producing resinous cycloolefin monomer and method for producing polymer
DE3922546A1 (en) 1989-07-08 1991-01-17 Hoechst Ag METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION OF CYCLOOLEFINPOLYMERS
JPH0463807A (en) 1990-03-06 1992-02-28 Idemitsu Kosan Co Ltd Norbornene polymer, preparation thereof, film prepared therefrom, and preparation of the film
US5054872A (en) 1990-03-16 1991-10-08 Ibm Corporation Polymeric optical waveguides and methods of forming the same
US5371158A (en) 1990-07-05 1994-12-06 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Bulk polymerization using specific metallocene catalysts for the preparation of cycloolefin polymers
JPH04107403A (en) 1990-08-28 1992-04-08 Brother Ind Ltd Optical waveguide array and production thereof
US5230990A (en) 1990-10-09 1993-07-27 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Method for producing an optical waveguide array using a resist master
US5046800A (en) 1990-10-09 1991-09-10 At&T Bell Laboratories Article comprising a passive optical waveguide
DE59209568D1 (en) 1991-02-27 1999-01-07 Ticona Gmbh Process for the preparation of cycloolefin (co) polymers with narrow molecular weight distribution
ATE223440T1 (en) 1991-03-09 2002-09-15 Basell Polyolefine Gmbh METALLOCENE AND CATALYST
US5254655A (en) 1992-02-05 1993-10-19 Hercules Incorporated Organosilicon polymers, and dyes, exhibiting nonlinear optical response
US5238877A (en) * 1992-04-30 1993-08-24 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy Conformal method of fabricating an optical waveguide on a semiconductor substrate
US5265184A (en) 1992-05-28 1993-11-23 Motorola, Inc. Molded waveguide and method for making same
JP3350993B2 (en) * 1993-01-12 2002-11-25 ジェイエスアール株式会社 Optical waveguide device
US6214951B1 (en) 1993-02-12 2001-04-10 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Cycloolefin copolymers having high tear strength and low optical attenuation
DE59402624D1 (en) 1993-02-12 1997-06-12 Hoechst Ag Process for the preparation of cycloolefin copolymers
DE4304291A1 (en) 1993-02-12 1994-08-18 Hoechst Ag Cycloolefin copolymers with low melt viscosity and low optical attenuation
EP0610843B1 (en) 1993-02-12 1999-05-19 Ticona GmbH Process for preparing cyclo-olefin polymers
US5468819A (en) 1993-11-16 1995-11-21 The B.F. Goodrich Company Process for making polymers containing a norbornene repeating unit by addition polymerization using an organo (nickel or palladium) complex
US5760139A (en) 1994-04-18 1998-06-02 Yasuhiro Koike Graded-refractive-index optical plastic material and method for its production
EP1249715A3 (en) 1994-04-18 2003-01-02 Yasuhiro Koike Graded-refractive-index optical plastic material and method for its production
DE4422157A1 (en) 1994-06-24 1996-01-04 Hoechst Ag Process for the preparation of cycloolefin copolymers
US5540799A (en) * 1994-10-31 1996-07-30 Motorola Method of fabricating optical waveguide from a laminate
US6294616B1 (en) 1995-05-25 2001-09-25 B. F. Goodrich Company Blends and alloys of polycyclic polymers
EP0752598A1 (en) 1995-06-09 1997-01-08 Yasuhiro Koike Graded-refractive-index optical plastic material and method for its production
EP0755945B1 (en) 1995-07-26 1998-11-25 Sulzer Chemtech AG Process and device for carrying out a polymerisation in a tube reactor
DE19642886A1 (en) 1996-10-17 1998-04-23 Fraunhofer Ges Forschung Process for the production of a thermo-optic variable polymer material and its application
AU725276B2 (en) 1996-11-26 2000-10-12 Sumitomo Pharmaceuticals Company, Limited Novel naphthyridine derivatives
US5991493A (en) * 1996-12-13 1999-11-23 Corning Incorporated Optically transmissive bonding material
JP3299477B2 (en) 1997-02-07 2002-07-08 光信 宮城 Manufacturing method of hollow waveguide
US5881201A (en) 1997-03-11 1999-03-09 Hoechst Celanese Corporation Backlighting lightpipes for display applications
US6054007A (en) 1997-04-09 2000-04-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Method of forming shaped adhesives
US5929181A (en) 1997-06-09 1999-07-27 The B.F.Goodrich Co. Method for preparation of copolymers of ethylene/norbornene-type monomers with nickel catalysts
WO1998057206A1 (en) 1997-06-10 1998-12-17 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Rib-type integrated optical interconnect
JP3477077B2 (en) 1997-07-01 2003-12-10 株式会社東芝 Negative photosensitive resin composition, pattern forming method using the same, and electronic component
CN1112594C (en) 1997-10-02 2003-06-25 旭硝子株式会社 Refractivity distributing optical resin material
DE69807816T2 (en) 1997-11-07 2003-05-28 Rohm & Haas Method and device for molding a plastic plate
JPH11305055A (en) * 1998-04-22 1999-11-05 Sharp Corp Production of optical waveguide and production of master raw glass for production of optical waveguide
DE19849527A1 (en) 1998-10-27 2000-05-04 Basf Ag Process for the epoxidation of olefins
JP3680920B2 (en) * 1999-02-25 2005-08-10 信越化学工業株式会社 Novel ester compound, polymer compound, resist material, and pattern forming method
US6265131B1 (en) * 2000-04-03 2001-07-24 Everlight Usa. Inc. Alicyclic dissolution inhibitors and positive potoresist composition containing the same

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE4104392A1 (en) 1991-02-14 1992-08-20 Hoechst Ag Light wave guide and new polymers - are based on poly:norbornene or poly:norbornadiene prods. partic. contg. fluoro or fluoro-alkyl substits.
GB2332902A (en) 1997-12-31 1999-07-07 Hyundai Electronics Ind Bicycloalkene derivatives and polymers thereof
GB2340830A (en) 1998-08-26 2000-03-01 Hyundai Electronics Ind Novel monomers for photoresist, polymers thereof and photoresist compositions using the same
WO2000020472A1 (en) 1998-10-05 2000-04-13 The B.F. Goodrich Company Catalyst and methods for polymerizing cycloolefins
WO2000034344A1 (en) 1998-12-09 2000-06-15 The B.F.Goodrich Company In mold addition polymerization of norbornene-type monomers using group 10 metal complexes

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7910674B2 (en) 1998-10-05 2011-03-22 Promerus, Llc Polymerized cycloolefins using transition metal catalyst and end products thereof
US6825307B2 (en) 1998-10-05 2004-11-30 Promerus, Llc Catalyst and methods for polymerizing cycloolefins
US6903171B2 (en) 1998-10-05 2005-06-07 Promerus, Llc Polymerized cycloolefins using transition metal catalyst and end products thereof
WO2003100487A1 (en) * 2002-05-24 2003-12-04 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Polymer micro-ring resonator device and fabrication method
CN1304861C (en) * 2002-06-27 2007-03-14 松下电器产业株式会社 Optical waveguide and method for mfg. same
WO2004035636A2 (en) * 2002-10-15 2004-04-29 Promerus, Llc Polymerized cycloolefins using transition metal catalyst and end products thereof
WO2004035636A3 (en) * 2002-10-15 2005-01-13 Promerus Llc Polymerized cycloolefins using transition metal catalyst and end products thereof
JP2011162772A (en) * 2003-11-21 2011-08-25 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Optical waveguide and method thereof
US7820356B2 (en) 2003-11-21 2010-10-26 Sumitomo Bakelite Co. Ltd. Optical waveguides and methods thereof
US8021825B2 (en) 2003-11-21 2011-09-20 Sumitomo Bakelite Co., Ltd. Optical waveguides and methods thereof
US8053166B2 (en) 2003-11-21 2011-11-08 Sumitomo Bakelite Co. Ltd. Optical waveguides and methods thereof
US8420293B2 (en) 2003-11-21 2013-04-16 Sumitomo Bakelite Co., Ltd. Optical waveguides and methods thereof
CN100371357C (en) * 2004-03-26 2008-02-27 罗姆和哈斯公司 Catalyst complexes for polymerization and co-polymerization of cyclic olefins
US8378064B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2013-02-19 Trustees Of Boston University Hydrophilic polymers as medical lubricants and gels
US8329841B2 (en) 2007-03-22 2012-12-11 Lg Chem, Ltd. Photoreactive polymer and method for preparing the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US6677175B2 (en) 2004-01-13
WO2002010231A3 (en) 2002-07-11
TW534913B (en) 2003-06-01
EP1342110A2 (en) 2003-09-10
KR20030036655A (en) 2003-05-09
KR100804249B1 (en) 2008-02-20
WO2002010810A2 (en) 2002-02-07
WO2002010810A3 (en) 2003-06-26
JP2004505308A (en) 2004-02-19
US20020064896A1 (en) 2002-05-30
US20020103317A1 (en) 2002-08-01
US6538087B2 (en) 2003-03-25
JP5218713B2 (en) 2013-06-26
AU2001280856A1 (en) 2002-02-13
CN1555387A (en) 2004-12-15
KR20030036654A (en) 2003-05-09
AU2001279056A1 (en) 2002-02-13
EP1307493A2 (en) 2003-05-07
JP2004505129A (en) 2004-02-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6538087B2 (en) Polymeric compositions for forming optical waveguides; optical waveguides formed therefrom; and methods for making same
US6455650B1 (en) Catalyst and methods for polymerizing cycloolefins
US7910674B2 (en) Polymerized cycloolefins using transition metal catalyst and end products thereof
EP1155057B1 (en) In mold addition polymerization of norbornene-type monomers using group 10 metal complexes
US7612146B2 (en) Polymeric compositions and uses therefor
US7786230B2 (en) Method for polymerizing cycloolefin polymer containing polar functional groups and electronics devices employing the polymerized cycloolefins
TWI432805B (en) Method of forming an optical waveguide structure
KR101718941B1 (en) Cyclic olefin compound having photoreactive group and photoreactive polymer
KR101719686B1 (en) Photoreactive copolymer and alignment layer comprising the same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020037001304

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2001959283

Country of ref document: EP

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 018164064

Country of ref document: CN

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2001959283

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020037001304

Country of ref document: KR